Agenda packet — San Carlos City Council, November 10, 2025 (part 7 of 10)

22. Make-up Bricks to match Donor Bricks 321400

23. Sealant for Unit Pavers and Brick Pavers 321400

24. Catenary Light System

25. Drainage Inlets 330500

26. Storm Drain Pipe 334000

27. Bioretention Soil 334727

28. Class II Permeable 334727

29. Suspended Pavement System 329451

30. Sanitary Sewer Pipes and Structures 333000, 330500

31. Water Pipes, Structures and Valves 331116, 330500

32. Irrigation System 328400

33. Soil Test Reports for existing planting soil, import soil, amendments with lab recommendations 329300

34. Plant photographs/tagging, product data, mulch 329300

35. Suspended Pavement System (Soil Cells) 329451

36. Active Vehicular Barriers (Hydraulic Bollards) 347113

37. Custom Bench Type 1 323300, 034801, 057210,
064013

38. Tables and Chairs 323300

39. Waste Receptacle 323300

40. Bike Racks 323300

41. Tree Grate 323300

42. Custom Metal Tree Stakes 323300

43. Trench Drain Grate 323300

44. E-bike Level 2 Charging Stations for Bicycles 323300

45. Anti-skate stopper 323300

46. Mass Timber Structure

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1070
Special Provisions Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A-Harrington Park Page SP-17 Project No. C2215
Additional Submittals. – The lists provided is not comprehensive and no claim for their completeness is implied. Additional submittals will be required for the Facilities Building and the associated Timber Canopy Structure; specific submittal requirements for this scope of work can be found in the relevant specifications sections. Submittal of each and every item on the lists shall not relieve the Contractor of supplying all information needed, or of complying with any of the other requirements of the specifications. Revised lists may be issued and items may be added to the list supplied.

28. STREET SWEEPING
Street sweeping using a mechanical sweeper with vacuum capabilities shall occur, at a minimum, every Wednesday and Friday at the end of the working day. The Contractor shall clean and sweep roadways and on-site paved areas of all materials attributed to or involved in the work. In addition, the Contractor shall clean and sweep roadways as necessary to ensure that vehicle and pedestrian travel is not endangered by the presence of loose materials. Construction site entrances shall be kept free of these materials.

29. CLEANING OF WORK AREA
The Contractor shall clean the work area and leave no excess of materials from thermoplastic by end of each working day.

30. CONSTRUCTION SCREENING FENCING
The Contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain a temporary screening fence along the project perimeter along Laurel Street where directed by Contact Drawings. The purpose of the fence is to provide site security, minimize visual impacts of construction, and display project information and imagery to the public.

The screening fence shall be a minimum of 8 feet in height, constructed of chain link with an opaque or printed mesh screening fabric securely attached. The fabric shall:

1. Be manufactured of durable, UV-resistant, weatherproof material (minimum 8 oz/sy polyester or PVC mesh).

2. Be digitally printed with the approved project rendering, title, and informational graphics provided by the City of San Carlos.

3. Provide at least 85% opacity to effectively screen the construction area from public view.

4. Use fade-resistant inks suitable for long-term outdoor exposure.

5. The printed screening mesh shall include the full-color rendering of the completed project and may include City branding, project title, anticipated completion date, and contractor acknowledgment, as directed by the Engineer.

The City will provide the approved digital artwork and layout for printing. The Contractor shall be responsible for:

1. Scaling the artwork to fit the required fence lengths and heights.

2. Ensuring proper alignment of printed panels for a continuous, visually cohesive display.

3. Providing a color proof and sample section for City approval prior to full production.

The Contractor shall submit:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1071
Special Provisions Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A-Harrington Park Page SP-18 Project No. C2215

1. Manufacturer’s data for the mesh material and printing process.

2. A shop drawing or layout showing fence locations and rendered areas.

3. A proof of the printed rendering for approval by the City prior to fabrication.

The printed mesh shall be tightly secured to the chain link fencing using weatherresistant ties at no more than 12-inch intervals. The Contractor shall maintain the fence and printed mesh in clean and undamaged condition for the duration of the project. Torn, faded, or vandalized portions shall be repaired or replaced within 48 hours of notice from the Engineer.

The Contractor shall maintain the fence and rendering in clean and serviceable condition for the duration of the project. Upon project completion, the Contractor shall remove the screening fence and rendering and dispose of all materials off-site.

31. WEB BASED CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT
The Contractor shall utilize e-Builder (recently name changed to Trimble Unity Construct) for submission of data and documents throughout the duration of the Contract, unless specified otherwise in the Contract Documents. E-Builder is a web-based construction management application hosted by e-Builder. It shall be the primary means of project information submission and management or as otherwise agreed upon with the Engineer. The Engineer will establish the Contractor’s access to e-Builder by providing one license to Contractor personnel at City’s cost. The City will provide one 1-hour classroom training or a web-based seminar.

E-Builder is a web-based environment and therefore it is subject to the inherent speed and connectivity limitation of the Internet. The Contractor is responsible for its own connectivity to the Internet. E-Builder response time is dependent on the Contractor’s equipment, including processor speed, Internet access speed, etc. and current traffic on the Internet. The City will not be liable for any delays associated with the usage of eBuilder including, but not limited to: slow response time, down time periods, connectivity problems, or loss of information. The Contractor shall ensure connectivity to the eBuilder system whether at the home office or job site. Under no circumstances will usage of e-Builder be grounds for a time extension or cost adjustment to the Contract.

Data entered in a collaborative mode (entered with the intent to share as determined by permissions and workflows within the e-Builder system) by the Engineer and the Contractor will be jointly owned. The Contractor is responsible for managing, tracking, and documenting the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

The City’s acceptance via automated system notification or audit logs extends only to the face value of the submitted documentation and does not constitute validation of the Contractor’s submitted information. While regular email will still be used foR communication, e-Builder shall be utilized as much as possible in connection with all document and information management required by these Contract Documents.

Contractor shall be responsible for scanning or otherwise converting to electronic format all project submittals and Contractor correspondence, drawings, sketches, etc., and uploading them to the e-Builder web site and shall be responsible for the validity of its information placed in e-Builder. The Contractor shall utilize the existing forms and processes in e-Builder to the maximum extent possible. If a required form does not exist in e-Builder, the Contractor shall include a form of its own or one provided by the

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1072
Special Provisions Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A-Harrington Park Page SP-19 Project No. C2215
Engineer (if available) as an attachment to a submittal or process. Documents and information to be submitted electronically include, but are not limited to:
1) Submittals using the Submittal Module
2) Requests for Information using the RFI process
3) Change Order Requests using RFQ and CCO processes
4) Progress payments requests using Pay Application process 5) Construction Closeout process
6) Compliance documentation using MTAA process (test reports, QA/QC reports, certifications)
7) Schedules and associated updates
8) Official project correspondence, such as letters, using CTT process 9) T&M work tracking and submittal using TMEWB process

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1073
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1074
SECTION F – BID ITEM DESCRIPTIONS
Bid Item 1 – Mobilization/Demobilization
The contract lump sum price paid for “MOBILIZATION AND DEMOBILIZATION” includes full compensation for all materials, labor, equipment, and permits, and performance of all work including, but not limited to maintaining a physical presence at the project site for the duration of the Project; obtaining bonding and insurance; obtaining any permits not provided by the City; obtaining additional work and/or disposal areas as needed; establishing safety programs and posting all OSHA required notices; coordination with City, PG&E, and City’s subcontractors; and demobilizing/finalizing cleanup upon completion of the project. The payment schedule for this item shall conform to the percentages and requirements set forth in California Public Contract Code § 10264.Total compensation shall not exceed 10% of the total bid price.

Bid Item 2 – Traffic Management
The contract lump sum price paid for “TRAFFIC CONTROL” includes full compensation for all materials, labor, equipment and incidentals to provide construction traffic control and a specific traffic management plan; establishing detours and one lane traffic with flagmen. The traffic control plan must be approved prior to the start of construction at all locations as described in the Contract Documents, as shown on the Plans, or as directed by the Engineer. The traffic control plan shall meet the current Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) requirements. Payment for this item shall be made in accordance with the following schedule:
25 percent of the lump sum upon final SWPPP approval, 25 percent at 50 percent of overall project completion, 25 percent at 75 percent of overall project completion, and the remaining 25 percent upon final project completion and cleaning of the stormwater drainage system. Total compensation shall not exceed 5% of the total bid price.

Bid Item 3 – Water Pollution Control
The contract lump sum price paid for “WATER POLLUTION CONTROL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in preventing contamination of storm water runoff, complete in place, including preparing a water pollution control program as well as installing, removing, and maintaining best management practices, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer. Payment for this item shall be made in accordance with the following schedule: 25 percent of the lump sum upon final SWPPP approval, 25 percent at 50 percent of overall project completion, 25 percent at 75 percent of overall project completion, and 25 percent upon final project completion and cleaning of the stormwater drainage system.

Bid Item 4 – Construction Layout
The contract lump sum price paid for “CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in construction surveying, complete in place, including establishing a control line and

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1075
control points, construction staking, and performing as-built drawing, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications, and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Contractor shall be required to establish layout and grade stakes/hubs in the field at a sufficient interval (as determined by the Engineer) to allow for the City of San Carlos’ Representative to review Contractors layout. The layout and grades shall be reviewed by the City of San Carlos’ Representative prior to execution of the work. Construction stakes and markings shall be removed from the site of the work when no longer needed. Partial Payments will be made based on the percent complete estimated by the Engineer.

Bid Item 5 – Concrete Flatwork Removal
The contract price paid per square foot for “CONCRETE FLATWORK REMOVAL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in demolition and disposal of asphalt pavement, asphalt grinding and Portland Cement Concrete flatwork, complete in place, including sawcut of concrete, removal and disposal of concrete flatwork, removal and disposal of asphalt pavement, disposal of aggregate base, concrete curbs, gutters and retaining walls, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 6 – Concrete Curb & Gutter Removal
The contract price paid per linear foot for “CONCRETE CURB & GUTTER REMOVAL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in applying slurry seal surfacing, complete in place, including sawcut of concrete, remove, and dispose of concrete curbs, curbs and gutter, asphalt concrete for “shear-in”, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 7 – Asphalt Pavement Removal
The contract price paid per square foot for “ASPHALT PAVEMENT REMOVAL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in removing asphalt and concrete, complete in place, including, but not limited to, saw cutting and debris disposal, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 8 – Remove Trees
The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE TREES” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in removal of trees, complete in place, including, but not limited to, removal and

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1076
disposal trees complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 9 – Remove Lights
The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE LIGHTS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in removal of lighting, complete in place, including, but not limited to, removal and disposal of the fixtures and conductors, foundation, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 10 – Remove Pullboxes
The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE PULLBOXES” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in removal of pullboxes, complete in place, including, but not limited to, removal and disposal of pullboxes, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 11 – Remove Existing Water Valve and Meter Box The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE EXISTING WATER VALVE AND METER BOX” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in removing existing water valve and meter boxes, complete in place, including proper disposal, and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 12 – Remove Existing Water Laterals and Water Valves The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE EXISTING WATER LATERALS AND WATER VALVES” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in removing existing water lateral and valves, complete in place, including trenching, capping lateral at the main, proper disposal of pipe and base material and soil, and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 13 – Remove Existing Water Fountain (incl. Cap) and Back Flow Preventer The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE EXISTING WATER FOUNTAIN (INCL. CAP) AND BACK FLOW PREVENTER” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in removing existing water fountain, complete in place, including capping of service lateral at the main, proper disposal of

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1077
materials, and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 14 – Remove Existing Storm Drain Inlet and Subdrains The contract unit price paid for each “REMOVE EXISTING STORM DRAIN INLET AND SUBDRAINS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in removing existing storm drain inlets and subdrains, complete in place, including proper disposal, and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 15 – Remove Existing Storm Drain Laterals
The contract price paid per linear for “REMOVE EXISTING STORM DRAIN LATERALS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in removing existing storm drain laterals, complete in place, including trenching, excavating, removing and disposing of soil, removing and disposing of all base material, existing pipe, handling, off-hauling, backfilling, restoring the surface equal to the original condition, and all material or work necessary to remove and dispose of the pipe, and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 16 – Blueman Removal and Reinstallation
The contract lump sum price paid for “BLUEMAN REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to remove, transport, store, and reinstall the existing statue at the new designated location, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, documentation of existing conditions; protection of surrounding surfaces and features; careful dismantling or detachment of the statue, base, and anchorage components; labeling, crating, and secure transport of all salvaged parts; temporary storage and protection of the statue to prevent damage or deterioration; preparation of the new foundation, including excavation, grading, formwork, reinforcing steel, and concrete as required; reinstallation, alignment, and secure anchorage of the statue; cleaning, surface repair, and touch-up as necessary to restore the original appearance; coordination with the Owner, Engineer, and conservator (if applicable); restoration of disturbed areas; disposal of excess materials; and final cleaning and preparation for acceptance by the City, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 17 – Park Sign Removal and Reinstallation
The contract lump sum price paid for “PARK SIGN REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals,

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1078
and for performing all work necessary to carefully remove, transport, and reinstall an existing park sign, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, documentation of existing conditions; protection of adjacent landscaping, structures, and utilities; careful disassembly or detachment of sign panels, posts, bases, and foundations; labeling, storage, and secure transport to prevent damage; cleaning, repair, and refinishing of sign components as needed; excavation and preparation of new footing locations; furnishing and placing new concrete foundations, anchor bolts, and hardware; reassembly, alignment, and secure installation of the sign at the new location; backfilling, compaction, and surface restoration; and final cleaning and preparation for acceptance by the City, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 18 – Plaque Removal and Reinstallation
The contract lump sum price paid for “PLAQUE REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to carefully remove, transport, and reinstall an existing plaque, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, documentation of existing conditions; protection of surrounding surfaces and structures; removal of plaque, anchors, and backing materials; cleaning and restoration of the plaque surface as required; secure storage and protection during construction; preparation of the new mounting surface, including drilling, patching, or finishing; furnishing and installing new fasteners, anchors, or sealants; reinstallation of the plaque at the new location per plans; final cleaning, touch-up, and alignment; and restoration of disturbed areas, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 19 – Miscellaneous Demolition
The contract lump sum price paid for “MISCELLANEOUS DEMOLITION” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in demolition, complete in place, including demolition of stage structure, disposal of material, salvage and reinstallation of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 20 – Earthwork
The contract price paid per cubic yardfor “EARTHWORK” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in completing earthwork, complete in place, including, cutting, transporting of soil, placing fill, grading, shaping, and compacting, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Payment for Earthwork will be the sum of cut and fills of in-place material. The Engineer will make no allowance for shrink or swell of the material. The Engineer will measure this value by completing a survey of the area after clearing, grubbing and demolition but prior to grading.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1079
Once the Contractor achieves subgrade, the Engineer will complete a second survey of the area. The difference in the two surveys as calculated by AutoCAD or similar electronic tool will establish the value of earthwork paid to the Contractor Bid Item 21 – Export
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “EXPORT” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved exporting soil, complete in place, testing, transporting of soil, and paying disposal fees, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. In the event that export quantities exceed the bid item quantities by more than twenty percent (20%), additional export shall be compensated at the same unit rate provided by the contractor for the bid item at time of bid receipt and as approved by the Engineer.

Bid Item 22 – Groundwater Handling
The contract unit price paid per gallon for “GROUNDWATER HANDLING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals for performing all work necessary for dewatering operations and disposal of groundwater, if encountered. This payment shall be considered full compensation for handling, containment, and proper discharge of groundwater in accordance with all applicable regulations and requirements of the City of San Carlos, the San Mateo County Environmental Health Department, and the San Francisco Bay Regional Water Quality Control Board.

Bid Item 23 – Fine Grading
The contract price paid per square foot for “FINE GRADING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in fine grading, complete in place as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 24 to 29 – Various Curbs
The contract prices paid per linear foot for “STANDARD CONCRETE CURB”; “EXTENDED CURB AT PROPERTY LINE”; “ROLLED CURB”; “RETAINING CURB”; “EXTENDED CURB AT BIORENTION” and “RETAINING CURB AT BIORETENTION (ADJACENT TO PROPERTY LINE)” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing concrete elements, complete in place, including, construction of formwork, placement of concrete and reinforcement, and disposal of unsuitable materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1080
Bid Item 30 – Detectable Warning Surface
The contract price paid per square foot for “DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in installing truncated domes, complete in place, including traffic control, protection of existing facilities, applying tactile domes and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 31 to 33 – Various Pavers
The contract price paid per square foot for “BRICK PAVERS REINSTATED WITH CONCRETE SUBBASE,” “UNIT PAVERS,” and “ACCESSIBLE CONCRETE RAMP (UNIT PAVERS)” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing unit pavers complete in place, including, installing pavers and base material, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 34 – Asphalt Pavement
The contract unit price paid per ton for “ASPHALT PAVEMENT” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing asphalt pavement and asphalt “shear-in” at curbs/curbs and gutters, complete in place, including, transportation of material, saw cutting, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer. In the event that asphalt pavement quantities exceed the bid item quantities by more than twenty percent (20%), additional asphalt pavement shall be compensated at the same unit rate provided by the contractor for the bid item at time of bid receipt and as approved by the Engineer.

Bid Item 35 – Aggregate Base
The contract unit price paid per ton for “AGGREGATE BASE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in placing the aggregate, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. In the event that aggregate base quantities exceed the bid item quantities by more than twenty percent (20%), additional aggregate base shall be compensated at the same unit rate provided by the contractor for the bid item at time of bid receipt and as approved by the Engineer.

Bid Item 36, 37, & 39 – Various Concrete Pavement
The contract price paid per square foot for “VEHICULAR CONCRETE PAVEMENT,” “PEDESTRIAN CONCRETE PAVEMENT” and “CONCRETE PADS FOR BFP/HYDRANT”

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1081
includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing flatwork complete in place, including, applying surface treatments and reinforcement, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 38 – Concrete Curb & Gutter
The contract prices paid per linear foot for “CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER”; includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in constructing concrete elements, complete in place, including, construction of formwork, placement of concrete, and disposal of unsuitable materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 40 – Striping & Pavement Markings
The contract lump sum price paid for “STRIPING & PAVEMENT MARKINGS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in removing striping, pavement markers and pavement markings, complete in place, including referencing and documenting all existing striping with photographs and plan mark-ups prior to any trenching or excavation; removing and disposing all existing, conflicting and temporary traffic stripes, pavement markings, crosswalk striping as needed to install new thermoplastic permanent striping, pavement markers and pavement markings, including the removal and disposal of the resulting material, and all other work, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Special Provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 41 – Electrical Service Upgrade & PG&E Fee
The contract price paid for each “ELECTRICAL SERVICE UPGRADE & PG&E FEE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, fees, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide a complete electrical service upgrade, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of service equipment and all associated components; removal and proper disposal of existing service equipment as required; furnishing and installing new service panels, meter sockets, disconnects, grounding and bonding, conduits, raceways, and junction boxes; trenching, backfilling, and surface restoration as required for service connections; coordination with Pacific Gas and Electric (PG&E) for design review, applications, service shutdowns, cutovers, energization, inspections, and approvals; payment of all PG&E connection, inspection, and service upgrade fees; testing, commissioning, and demonstration of the upgraded service to the City, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1082
Bid Item 42 – 2” PVC Conduit for Comcast
The contract price paid per linear foot for “2” PVC Conduit for Comcast” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing site Comcast distribution conduits, complete in place, including, but not limited to, trenching, placing conduits and pull boxes, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 43 - Lighting Control Panel and Programing
The contract unit price for each “LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL and PROGRAMING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing lighting control panels, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of the panel and all associated components, enclosure, breakers, relays, time clocks, contactors, network interfaces, and all specified accessories, installation, mounting, and anchorage of the panel in the designated location, provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, wiring, grounding, and bonding, termination of branch circuits, control circuits, and communications wiring as required, programming of time schedules, daylight sensors, occupancy sensors, or other control devices for full functionality, programing, coordination with utility company, owner, and other trades as required, testing, commissioning, and demonstration of the panel and its operation to the City, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 44 – Metered Service Panel
The contract unit price paid for each “METERED SERVICE PANEL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work involved in providing meter service panels, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of the panel and all associated components; enclosure, main breaker, distribution breakers, bus bars, grounding and bonding equipment, meter socket, and all specified accessories; installation, mounting, and anchorage of the panel in the designated location; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, wiring, grounding, and bonding; branch circuits, and control wiring as required; coordination with the serving utility for meter installation, service activation, and inspections; testing, commissioning, and demonstration of the panel and its operation to the City, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 45 – Power Pedestal
The contract unit price paid for each “POWRE PEDESTAL” and includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide electrical outlets, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of receptacles, boxes, covers, faceplates, conduits, fittings, and wiring; installation of outlet boxes in walls, floors, or other designated

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1083
surfaces; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, and conductors from the outlet to the power source; grounding and bonding; termination of branch circuits; mounting and alignment of outlets and faceplates; labeling as required; coordination with other trades and finishes; testing, inspection, and verification of proper operation; and final cleaning and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, the National Electrical Code, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 46 – Lighting Inverter
The contract unit price paid for each “LIGHTING INVERTER” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and install a complete and operational lighting inverter system. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of the inverter unit, batteries, cabinets, enclosures, control panels, conduit, fittings, and all associated accessories; installation, mounting, alignment, and secure anchorage of the inverter in the designated location; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, wiring, grounding, and bonding; connection to the electrical distribution system and lighting circuits; programming, configuration, and testing of inverter controls, alarms, and monitoring systems; coordination with electrical panels, lighting controls, and other building systems; performance of factory and field start-up testing, commissioning, and verification of full functionality; submission of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, the National Electrical Code, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 47 to 48 – Various Electrical Panels
The contract unit price paid for each “ELECTRICAL PANEL A (42 CIRCUITS)” and “ELECTRICAL PANEL A1 (12 CIRCUITS)” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and install electrical panels, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of the panel, enclosures, breakers, bus bars, grounding equipment, and all associated components; installation, mounting, alignment, and secure anchorage at the designated location; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, wiring, grounding, and bonding; termination of service conductors, branch circuits, and control wiring; labeling of all circuits and devices; coordination with the utility company, other trades, and systems; testing, inspection, and verification of proper operation; submission of asbuilt drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, the National Electrical Code, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 49 to 56 – Various Electrical Conduit
The contract price paid per linear foot for “1/2"PVC CONDUIT WITH 3#12 AWG + GND.,” “3/4"PVC CONDUIT WITH 3#10 AWG + GND.,” “1"PVC CONDUIT WITH 3#10 AWG + GND.,”

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1084
“2 1/2"PVC CONDUIT WITH 4#3 AWG + GND. (PANEL A),” “1” EMT CONDUIT WITH 3 #6 AWG + GND. (PANEL A1) “1” PVC SPARE CONDUIT FOR FIRE ALARM/AV,” “1 ¼” PVC SPARE CONDUIT FOR AV,” and “3" PVC SPARE CONDUIT FOR CCTV AND AV” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing site electrical distribution, complete in place, including, but not limited to, trenching, placing conduits and pull boxes, and placement of conductors, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 57 – Trench and Backfill
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “TRENCH AND BACKFILL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in doing all work to trench and backfill electrical conduits, complete in place, including, excavation, subgrade preparation, and disposal, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 58 – Electrical Pull/Splice Box
The contract unit price for each “ELECTRICAL PULL/SPLICE BOX” and includes full compensation for furnishing all labor materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing pull and splice boxes, complete in place including procuring, delivering, and storing the box, cover, fittings, and all associated materials, excavation, shoring, and dewatering (if required) for proper placement, placing the box on a suitable foundation or bedding material, connecting all conduits, installing bushings, and sealing conduit entries, performing all required electrical splicing, taping, insulating, grounding, and bonding, installing covers, including labeling and security features, placing, compacting, and restoring all backfill, including replacement of pavement, turf, or landscaping, disposal of surplus excavated material, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 59 & 60 – Various Outlets
The contract unit price paid for each “120 V ELECTRICAL OUTLETS” and “240 V ELECTRICAL OUTLETS” and includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide electrical outlets, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of receptacles, boxes, covers, faceplates, conduits, fittings, and wiring; installation of outlet boxes in walls, floors, or other designated surfaces; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, and conductors from the outlet to the power source; grounding and bonding; termination of branch circuits; mounting and alignment of outlets and faceplates; labeling as required; coordination with other trades and finishes; testing, inspection, and verification of proper operation; and final cleaning and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, the National Electrical Code, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1085
Bid Item 61 – Level 2 Charging Stations for Bicycles
The contract unit price paid for each “LEVEL 2 CHARGING STATION FOR BICYCLES” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide complete and operable bicycle charging stations, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of charging units, pedestals, enclosures, receptacles, wiring, conduit, and mounting hardware; installation, alignment, and secure anchorage of the charging station at designated locations; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, and branch circuit wiring from the electrical source to the station; grounding and bonding; termination of conductors and integration with electrical panels and controls; coordination with the utility company, owner, and other trades as required; testing, commissioning, and demonstration of charging station functionality; submission of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; protection of installed equipment during construction; and final cleaning and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 62 – Fire Alarm Control Panel, FA Devices and wires The contract lump sum price paid for “FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL, DEVICES, AND WIRING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide a complete and operable fire alarm system, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of the fire alarm control panel (FACP), initiating devices, notification appliances, pull stations, detectors, modules, annunciators, and all associated accessories; installation, mounting, and secure anchorage of all equipment in designated locations; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, and fire alarm cabling/wiring; termination of circuits, grounding, and bonding; programming and configuration of the FACP and all connected devices; integration with building systems such as sprinkler, HVAC, security, and emergency power as required; coordination with the utility company, fire marshal, and other authorities having jurisdiction; testing, commissioning, and certification of the system in compliance with NFPA 72 and all applicable codes; submission of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; training of City’s personnel in operation of the system; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 63 to 67 – Various Lighting and Foundations
The contract unit price paid for each “STREET LIGHT,” SREET LIGHT FOOTNG,” “CATENARY LIGHT SYSTEM CORD,” “CATENARY LIGHT SYSTEM SHADE,” and CATENARY POLE AND FOOTING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing lighting, complete in place, including, but not limited to, providing and installing the fixtures and conductors, excavation, foundation, as

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1086
shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 68 – Security Camera
The contract unit price paid for each “SECURITY CAMERA” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and install security cameras, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of cameras, mounts, housings, brackets, junction boxes, network cables, conduits, connectors, and all associated accessories; installation, alignment, and secure anchorage of cameras at the locations shown on the plans; provision and installation of conduit, raceways, wiring, and power/data connections; termination of conductors and integration with the facility’s network and monitoring systems; programming, configuration, and testing of cameras for proper functionality and coverage; coordination with the Owner’s IT and security systems; verification of image quality, communication, and recording; submission of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance by the City, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 69 to 72 – Various Drainage Structures
The contract unit price paid for each “STD. DROP INLET TYPE 1”, “AREA DRAIN”, and “24” STORM DRAIN MANHOLE WITH ONE-WAY VALVE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing drainage structures, complete in place, including, excavation, backfill, and compaction, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 73 – Trench Drain
The contract price paid per linear foot for “TRENCH DRAIN” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing the trench drain, complete in place, including, trenching, backfill, compaction, and concrete forms, reinforcement and frames, surface restoration, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 74 to 77 – Various Storm Drain Pipe
The contract price paid per linear foot for “4” PERFORATED STORM DRAIN PIPE”, “6” STORM DRAIN PIPE” and “12" STORM DRAIN PIPE (PVC C900 CLASS 150)” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing storm drain pipe, complete in place, including, trenching,

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1087
backfill, compaction, and surface restoration, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 78 – Bioretention Soil Media
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “BIORETENTION SOIL MEDIA” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing bioretention soil, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 79 – Class II Permeable
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “CLASS II PERMEABLE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing the permeable material, complete in place, including, excavation, subgrade preparation, and disposal, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 80 – Splash Pad
The contract unit price paid for each “SPLASH PAD” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide concrete splash pads, complete in place, including, but not limited to, excavation, grading, and preparation of subgrade, furnishing and placing concrete, backfilling and compaction around pad edges protection of removal and disposal of waste materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 81 – Connect to Ex. Storm Drain
The contract unit price paid for each “CONNECT TO EX. STORM DRAIN” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing accommodations for connecting to the existing storm drain, including preservation of existing utility structures and pipes, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 82 – Stormwater Blocks / Soil Cells
The contract unit price paid per cubic yard for “Silva Cells” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide Soil Cells / Silva Cell systems, complete in place, including, but not limited

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1088
to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of Soil Cells / Silva Cell frames, decks, base components, connectors, geotextile fabric, aggregate, root barriers, and all specified accessories; excavation, grading, and preparation of subgrade; placement and assembly of Soil Cells / Silva Cells in accordance with manufacturer’s requirements; installation of irrigation lines, root paths, and aeration pipes where shown; backfilling, compaction, and installation of growing media and soil within the Soil Cells / Silva Cell system; coordination and placement of tree planting; placement of pavement, concrete, tree grates, trench drains, or surface treatments above the Soil Cells / Silva Cells as required; coordination with electrical boxes; coordination with underdrain system and stormdrains; coordination with utilities and other trades to avoid conflicts; protection of materials and system during construction; and final testing, inspection, and acceptance by the City, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 83 – Sanitary Sewer Lateral (PVC SDR-26) incl. Cleanout The contract price paid for each “SANITARY SEWER LATERAL (PVC SDR-26) INCL.

CLEANOUT” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in adjusting sewer laterals, complete in place, including complying with any and all permit conditions, inspections, saw cutting, trenching, excavation, removal and disposal of soil, warning tape, backfill, aggregate base, utility saddles, pavement restoration, connecting new lateral to sewer main, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 84 – 1.5" Water Service Lateral (Incl. tees)
The contract price paid for each “1.5" WATER SERVICE LATERAL (INCL. TEES)” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in placing the pipeline, complete in place, as shown on the plans, including connection to the main, fittings, restrains and appetences, removal and disposal of soil, trenching and backfilling, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 85 – 2” Water Meter Box
The contract unit price for each “2” WATER METER BOX” and includes full compensation for furnishing all labor materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing pull and splice boxes, complete in place including procuring, delivering, and storing the box, cover, fittings, and all associated materials, excavation, shoring, and dewatering (if required) for proper placement, placing the box on a suitable foundation or bedding material, connecting all pipes, installing covers, including labeling and security features, placing, compacting, and restoring all backfill, including replacement of pavement, turf, or landscaping, disposal of surplus excavated material, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1089
Bid Item 86 – Domestic Back Flow Preventer
The contract unit price paid for each “DOMESTIC BACKFLOW PREVENTER” and includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide backflow prevention assemblies and relocate existing back flow assemblies, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of the assembly and all associated components; excavation, grading, and preparation of subgrade; furnishing and placing concrete pads, footings, anchors, and enclosures as required; installation, mounting, alignment, and secure anchorage of the assembly in the designated location; provision and installation of valves, fittings, drains, piping, and connections to the water system; coordination with utilities and agencies for inspections, approvals, and certifications; testing, flushing, and commissioning of the assembly for proper operation; protection of the unit during construction; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 87 – Water Gate Valves
The contract unit price paid for each “WATER GATE VALVE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide gate valves, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of valves, valve boxes, lids, operators, stems, extensions, and all associated components; excavation, trenching, shoring, dewatering, and preparation of subgrade; installation, alignment, and anchorage of valves in the designated locations; connection to water mains, fittings, and piping; placement and adjustment of valve boxes and surface covers to final grade; backfilling, compaction, and surface restoration; testing, flushing, and disinfection of valves and associated piping; coordination with utilities and agencies for inspections and approvals; protection of installed work during construction; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance, in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 88 – Adjust Ex. Fire Hydrant to Grade
The contract unit price paid for each “ADJUST EXISTING FIRE HYDRANT TO GRADE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to adjust existing fire hydrants to the required finished grade, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, excavation and removal of surrounding material; adjustment of the hydrant barrel, extensions, and fittings; installation of new gaskets, bolts, restraints, or extensions as required; realignment and secure anchorage of the hydrant; adjustment or replacement of the valve box, cover, and appurtenances to match final grade; backfilling, compaction, and surface restoration, including pavement, curb, sidewalk, or landscape areas; testing for leaks and operability; coordination with the water utility for inspections; protection of the hydrant during construction; and final cleaning and preparation for acceptance, in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1090
Bid Item 89 – Irrigation Service Lateral
The contract price paid for each “IRRIGATION SERVICE LATERAL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in placing the pipeline, complete in place, as shown on the plans, including connection to the main, fittings, restrains and appetences, removal and disposal of soil, trenching and backfilling, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 90 – Amended Planting Soil
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “PLANTING SOIL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and place amended planting landscape soil, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, hauling, and storage of amended soil meeting the gradation, organic matter, pH, and fertility requirements specified; preparation of subgrade and removal of unsuitable material; spreading, grading, and compacting soil to the required depth and contours; incorporation of soil amendments, fertilizers, and conditioners as required; moisture conditioning and stabilization; coordination with irrigation and utility installations; cleanup of excess material; protection of soil stockpiles from erosion or contamination; and final preparation of soil surfaces for planting, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 91 – Import Soil
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “IMPORT SOIL” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and place amended imported landscape soil, complete in place. Work includes, but is not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, hauling, and storage of imported soil meeting the gradation, organic matter, pH, and fertility requirements specified; preparation of subgrade and removal of unsuitable material; spreading, grading, and compacting soil to the required depth and contours; incorporation of soil amendments, fertilizers, and conditioners as required; moisture conditioning and stabilization; coordination with irrigation and utility installations; cleanup of excess material; protection of soil stockpiles from erosion or contamination; and final preparation of soil surfaces for planting, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 92 – Street Tree
The contract unit price paid for each “STREET TREE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in planting, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1091
Bid Item 93 – Shrub
The contract price paid for each “SHRUB” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in planting, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 94 – Ground Cover
The contract price paid per square foot for “GROUND COVER” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in planting, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 95 – Mulch
The contract price paid per cubic yard for “MULCH” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in mulching, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 96 – Irrigation System
The contract lump sum price paid for “IRRIGATION SYSTEM” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide a complete and operable irrigation system, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of all irrigation equipment and components, backflow assembly, controllers, control valves, quick couplers, valve boxes, piping, fittings, wiring, and conduit, excavation, trenching, backfilling, compaction, and surface restoration; installation of controllers, sensors, and communication equipment; mounting and programming of central control units, including wiring and terminations; connection to water and electrical utilities, testing, flushing, and adjustment of piping, valves, and heads, coverage verification and final system balancing, submission of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; training of City staff in system operation, and compliance with all applicable codes, ordinances, and manufacturer’s requirements, as shown on plans and in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 97 – Tree Grates and Metal Tree Stakes
The contract unit price paid for each “TREE GRATE AND METAL TREE STAKES” includes full compensation for furnishing all engineering, shop drawings, labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing tree grates and metal tree

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1092
stakes, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 98 – Trench Drain Grate
The contract unit price paid for each “TRENCH DRAIN GRATE” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing tree grates and metal tree stakes, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 99 – Hydraulic Bollards
The contract unit price paid for each “HYDRAULIC BOLLARDS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing amenities, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 100 – Custom Bench Type 1
. The contract unit price paid for each “CUSTOM BENCH TYPE 1” includes full compensation for furnishing all engineering, shop drawings, labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing amenities, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 101 – Café Table and Chairs
The contract unit price paid for each “CAFÉ TABLE AND CHAIRS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing amenities, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 102 – Bike Rack
The contract unit price paid for each “BIKE RACK” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing accommodations for bicycle parking, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1093
Bid Item 103 – Trash/Recycle Receptacles
The contract unit price paid for each “TRASH/RECYCLE RECEPTACLES” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installing accommodations for trash and recycle receptacles, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104 – Restroom, Facilities Building with Pump Room, and Storage Building The contract lump sum price paid for “RESTROOM, FACILITIES BUILDING WITH PUMP ROOM, AND STORAGE BUILDING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved Facilities Building with Pump Room, Storage Room, and (2) separate Public Restrooms, covered common sink area and associated tile, framing, including metal framed infill walls and roof structure, ceiling cladding and roofing, porcelain cladding and tiled for CMU walls, doors, louvers, toilet accessories and all necessary building hardware. Interior construction, wall finishes, infant changing table, floor finishes, Mechanical ventilation, Lighting & Branch Wiring (including lighting branch wiring and dimmers), electrical door locking system (inc. branch wiring), smoke detectors, alarms (including branch wiring), security camera conduits and branch wiring, and Facilities Building "HARRINGTON PARK" signage complete and operational in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 105 – Facilities Building Lighting
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING LIGHTING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide a complete interior and exterior lighting system for the facilities building, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of all luminaires, lamps, ballasts, drivers, controls, occupancy sensors, daylight sensors, switches, dimmers, and mounting hardware; installation, mounting, alignment, and secure anchorage of lighting fixtures in ceilings, walls, site structures, and exterior locations as shown on the plans; provision and installation of conduits, raceways, junction boxes, wiring, grounding, and bonding; termination of branch circuits and control wiring as required; programming of lighting control systems for schedules, occupancy, and daylighting; coordination with other trades and utility providers; testing, commissioning, and demonstration of lighting systems for full functionality; submission of as-built drawings, operation and maintenance manuals, and warranties; and final cleaning, adjustments, and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 106 – Facilities Building Wood Canopy
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING WOOD CANOPY” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1094
performing all work necessary to provide a complete and fully erected mass timber structure, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, storage, and protection of all timber and steel members, connectors, fasteners, and hardware; shop fabrication, cutting, and prefabrication of beams, columns, decking, panels, and specialty components; field layout, assembly, erection, and alignment of the timber and steel structure; installation of steel connections, plates, anchors, and associated structural hardware; provision and installation of fire protection, moisture barriers, sealants, coatings, and finishes as specified; coordination with foundations, utilities, and other building systems; compliance with all structural, seismic, and fire-resistance requirements; provision of temporary bracing and protection during erection; removal and disposal of waste materials; and final cleaning, inspection, and preparation for acceptance by the City, all in accordance with the Standard Specifications, these special provisions, approved shop drawings, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104 – Restroom, Facilities Building with Pump Room, and Storage Building Breakout:

Bid Item 104A – Facilities Building Foundation
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING AND WOOD CANOPY FOUNDATION” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in construction of the foundation for the both the Facilities Building, complete in place, including, but not limited to, earthwork including excavation, disposal of unsuitable materials, grading, and preparation of subgrade; furnishing and placing moisture barriers, formwork, reinforcing steel, dowels, and embedded items; procurement, delivery, handling of ready-mix concrete; placing, consolidating, finishing, curing, and jointing of the concrete mat slab; provision and installation of anchor bolts, sleeves, conduits, or blockouts as required; coordination with underground utilities, foundation drainage, and adjacent structures; removal and disposal of excess materials; backfilling, compaction, and surface restoration around slab edges; protection of concrete during curing; and final cleaning, adjustments, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104B – Facilities Building CMU Walls
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING CMU WALLS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to construct complete concrete masonry unit (CMU) walls for the facilities building, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of CMU blocks, grout, mortar, reinforcing steel, ties, anchors, and embedded items; layout, alignment, and construction of walls to the lines and grades shown; furnishing and placing reinforcing bars, dowels, bond beams, lintels, and structural connectors; grouting and consolidation of reinforced cells; installation of embedded conduits, sleeves, and blockouts; integration with structural steel, concrete, roofing, and other building systems; application of damp proofing, insulation, sealants, or finishes as specified; installation of control

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1095
joints, expansion joints, and joint reinforcement; scaffolding, bracing, and temporary supports; cleanup and disposal of waste materials; and final preparation of walls for inspection and acceptance by the City, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104C – Facilities Building Steel Framing
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING STEEL FRAMING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to construct complete steel struts, joists, struts, and associated structural components, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of framing, hangars, and connectors, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104D – Facilities Building Steel Thermal and Moisture Protection The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to construct complete insulation and water barriers, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104E – Facilities Building Roofing
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING ROOFING” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary for the roof, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of tapered rigid insulation, noncombustible roof bares, and build up asphalt membrane, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104F – Facilities Building Doors and Skylight
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING DOORS AND SKYLIGHT” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to construct interior and exterior doors, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1096
Bid Item 104G – Facilities Building Exhaust Fans
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING EXHAUST FAN” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and install the complete the ventilation system, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104H – Facilities Building Electrical System
The contract lump sum price paid for “ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and install the electrical system, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104I – Facilities Building Plumbing System
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING PLUMBING SYSTEMS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide and install the potable water and waste pluming, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104J – Facilities Building Finishes
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITES BUILDING FINISHES” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to complete gypsum board, cement backer board, tiling, and painting, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104K – Facilities Building Specialties and Furnishings The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITEIS BUILDING SPECIALTIES AND FURNISHINGS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to construct furnishings, complete in place, including, but not limited to, procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1097
Bid Item 104L – Facilities Building Alarm System and Detectors The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITES BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM)” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, fees, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to provide a complete and operable fire and life safety system, complete in place, including, but not limited to, final design and submittal; procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104M –Drinking Fountain
The contract lump sum price paid for “DRINKING FOUNTAIN” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary for the drinking fountain, complete in place, including, but not limited to procurement, delivery, handling, and storage of materials, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

Bid Item 104N – Facilities Building Miscellaneous Work to Cover All other Items in Construction Documents
The contract lump sum price paid for “FACILITIES BUILDING MISCELLANEOUS WORK TO COVER ALL OTHER ITEMS IN CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS” includes full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for performing all work necessary to construct complete the facilities building, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specifications and these Technical Specifications, and as directed by the Engineer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1098
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

TECHNICAL PROVISIONS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1099
100% Submittal / Bid Set

LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT

WALLACE ROBERTS & TODD, INC CIVIL ENGINEER
CSWST2

ARCHITECT

WARE ASSOCIATES

CANOPY STRUCTURAL ENGINEER

STRUCTURECRAFT BUILDERS USA, INC

MECHANCIAL & PLUMBING ENGINEER

BELDEN CONSULTING ENGINEER ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

AURUM CONSULTING ENGINEERS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1100
100% Submittal / Bid Set

FACILITIES BUILDING STRUCTURAL

DESIGNER

WARE ASSOCIATES

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1101
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 2 | EXISTING CONDITIONS
024100 DEMOLITIONS
DIVISION 3 | CONCRETE
031000 CONCRETE FORMWORK
031500 DRILLED DOWELS, EPOXY ANCHORS
032000 CONCRETE REINFORCING
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
033500 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FINISHING
034801 SITE PRECAST CONCRETE
DIVISION 04 | MASONRY BRICK BLOCK AND STONE
042200 CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
DIVISION 5 | METALS
050519 EXPANSION ANCHORS, SCREWS AND POWDERACTUATED FASTENERS 051200 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
054000 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS
057210 LANDSCAPE METAL FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 6 | WOOD AND PLASTICS
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY
061643 GYPSUM SHEATHING
061719 CROSS-LAMINATED TIMBER (CLT)
061800 GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
064013 EXTERIOR WOODWORK

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1102
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set
DIVISION 7 | THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
071300 PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET MEMBRANE

WATERPROOFING
071390 ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT
071416 LATEX BASE MASONERY WATERPROOFER
072100 THERMAL INSULATION
072500 WEATHER BARRIERS
074113 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
075216 SBS MODIFIED BITUMEN ROOFING
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
077100 ROOF SPECIALTIES
078400 FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALANTS
079200 JOINT SEALANTS
DIVISION 8 | DOORS AND WINDOWS
081113 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
083100 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
083323 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS
087100 DOOR HARDWARE
089000 LOUVERS & VENTS
DIVISION 9 | FINISHES
092216 NON-STRUCTURAL COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
092813 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER BOARDS
092900 GYPSUM BOARD
093000 TILING
093413 ADHERED PORCELAIN TILE CLADDING
096723 RESINOUS FLOORING
099100 PAINTING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1103
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set
099623 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING SYSTEM
099700 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER
DIVISION 10 | SPECIALTIES
101400 CAST METAL LETTERS
102800 RESTROOM ACCESSORIES
DIVISION 22 | PLUMBING
220000 PLUMBING
220813 TESTING PIPING SYSTEMS
221005 PLUMBING PIPING
221006 PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES
224100 PLUMBING FIXTURES
DIVISION 23 | HEATING, VENTILATION AND AIR

CONDITIONING
23 34 16 CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS
DIVISION 26 | ELECTRICAL
260500 GENERALELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
260519 LINE VOLTAGE WIRE AND CABLE
260533 OUTLET, JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
260542 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS
260543 UNDERGROUND DUCTS
260544 IN GRADE PULL-BOXES
262416 PANELBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
262726 DEVICES WIRING
262816 CIRCUIT BREAKERS
265113 ARCHITECTURAL LUMINAIRES, SOURCES, AND

COMPONENTS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1104
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set
DIVISION 28 | ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
281300 SECURITY CAMERA SYSTEM
DIVISION 31 | EARTHWORK
311000 SITE CLEARING
312000 EARTH MOVING
312300 EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE GEOFOAM
312333 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
DIVISION 32 | EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
321123 AGGREGATE BASE
321216 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING
321313 SITE CONCRETE FORMWORK
321400 UNIT PAVING
321613 CONCRETE PAVING, WALLS AND CURBS
321726 TACTILE WARNING SURFACE
323300 SITE FURNISHINGS
328400 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
329300 PLANTING
329451 SUSPENDED PAVEMENT SYSTEM (SOIL CELL)
DIVISION 33 | UTILITIES
330500 UTILITY STRUCTURES
331116 WATER DISTRIBUTION UTILITIES
333000 SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEM
334000 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES
334727 BIORETENTION
DIVISION 34 | TRANSPORTATION
347113 ACTIVE VEHICULAR BARRIERS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1105
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set
--END OF SECTION--

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1106
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 024100 - 1
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
SECTION 024100 – DEMOLITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Specifications for the demolition and removal of pavements and structures, including backfilling of resultant excavations and depressions, as indicated.

B. Extent of demolition work shall be as follows:

1. Buildings and structure foundations, footings, retaining walls, and foundation systems shall be completely removed to the base of the foundation.

2. Utility services to facilities to be removed or demolished shall be disconnected, cut, and capped.

3. Restoration of existing structures and facilities to remain in place which are damaged by demolition and removal operations.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing
B. Section 31 2000 - Earthwork

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

1. ANSI A10.6Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations B. California Code of Regulations (CCR)

1. CCR Title 8, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4 – Construction Safety Orders

2. CCR Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code, Chapter 33, Section 3303, Protection of Pedestrians during Construction or Demolition

1.4 PERMITS
A. Obtain all special permits and licenses and give all notices required for performance and completion of the demolition and removal work, hauling, and disposal of debris.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition Plan

1. Submit a comprehensive demolition plan, describing the proposed sequence, methods, and equipment for demolition, removal, and disposal of structure(s); include salvage if required. Do not proceed with demolition until the designated approval authority has approved the demolition plan.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1107
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 024100 - 2
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
B. Shop Drawings

1. Include drawings in plan of all structures to be demolished. Indicate stages or phases of the demolition work.

C. Permits

1. Submit copies of demolition, hauling, and debris disposal permits and notices for record purposes. Include description of proposed haul routes.

D. Waste Disposal and Recycling

1. The Contractor shall enter into a Construction and Demolition Waste Management Plan Agreement with the City of San Carlos and prepare a Waste Management Plan in accordance with the City of San Carlos Construction and Demolition (C&D) Ordinance.

2. Waste Management Plan (WMP):
a. Submit the City-approved form prior to construction. Include:
1) Estimated total waste generation (lbs or tons per sq. ft. per project type per the City’s standard table)
2) Methods for separating, salvaging, and recycling waste. 3) Names and contact information for haulers and recycling facilities. 4) Estimated quantities (by weight or volume) of materials to be salvaged, recycled, reused, or disposed.
5) Documentation that selected facilities are recognized recycling facilities approved by the City.
b. Waste Management Reports:
1) Submit interim reports if required by the City.
2) Submit final documentation within 60 days of final inspection, including:
a) Receipts and weight tags from all recycling and disposal facilities, clearly marked with the project location (San Carlos) and whether the material was recycled or disposed.
b) Receipts for salvaged or reused items listing the item type, quantity, and recipient
c. Receipts and Weight Tickets:
1) Acceptable documentation includes:
2) Receipts with gross, tare, and net weights.
3) Facility name and “C&D” code designation.
4) For materials measured by volume, 4 cubic yards = 1 ton conversion

3. The City retains the right to inspect, and subsequently approve or disapprove any and all recycling end markets, reuse or salvage outlets, and/or waste disposal facilities that are involved in the receipt of recyclables and/or waste materials generated from the Project.

Disapproval of such a market or outlet may be based on past or current violations of federal or state environmental, health, or safety laws, improper disposal activities, risk or liability exposure, or any other reason deemed sufficient by the City.

E. Site Conditions

1. Erect and maintain temporary bracing, shoring, lights, barricades, signs, and other measures as necessary to protect the public, workers, and adjoining property from damage from demolition work, all in accordance with applicable codes and regulations.

2. Open depressions and excavations occurring as part of this work shall be barricaded and posted with warning lights when accessible through adjacent property or through public access. Operate warning lights during hours from dusk to dawn each day and as otherwise required.

3. Protect utilities, pavements, and facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by demolition operations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1108
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 024100 - 3
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

4. Protection of Utilities: Protect active sewer, water, gas, electric, and other utilities; and drainage and irrigation lines indicated or, when not indicated, found or otherwise made known to the Contractor before or during demolition work.

5. Maintain existing utilities and protect from damage as necessary to satisfy the requirements of jurisdictional utility companies and related codes and regulations.

6. Make arrangements with affected utility companies and City to provide the information and services necessary to coordinate and complete the Work.

7. Do not disconnect or shut down any part of the existing utilities and services, except by permission of authorities having jurisdiction. Submit schedule of estimated shut-down time in order to obtain such permission, and notify all interested parties, neighbors, utilities, and municipal and county authorities, as required.

8. Utilities to be removed shall not be removed until shut-down time can be kept to a minimum.

Do not remove an existing utility line or service until the replacement line, crossover, or capping is ready to be performed.

9. Notify the Engineer and utility owners 72 hours before performing any excavation work.

Notify affected utilities by calling Underground Service Alert (USA) at 1-800-227-2600.

Contact utility owners not covered by USA, by calling the affected utility owners directly.

10. Protect active underground utilities from damage. If underground utilities are damaged in any way, notify the Engineer and affected utilities immediately for corrective action.

11. Noise and Dust Abatement: Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 5000 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. In addition, provide continuous noise and dust abatement as required to prevent disturbance and nuisance to the public and workers and to the occupants of adjacent premises and surrounding areas. Dampen or cover areas affected by demolition operations as necessary to prevent dust nuisance.

12. The Contract Drawings and related documents may not represent all surface conditions at the site and adjoining areas. The known surface conditions are as indicated, and shall be compared with actual conditions before commencement of work.

13. Existing utilities and drainage systems below grade are located from existing documents and from surface facilities such as manholes, valve boxes, area drains, and other such surface fixtures.

14. If existing active services encountered are not indicated or otherwise made known to the Contractor and interfere with the permanent facilities under construction, notify the Engineer in writing, requesting instructions on their disposition. Take immediate steps to ensure that the service provided is not interrupted, and do not proceed with the work until written instructions are received from the Engineer.

15. Thicknesses of existing pavements are from previous construction documents, and do not imply the actual depth or thickness of the total pavement or base material, where it occurs.

Remove pavement of whatever thickness as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials, Equipment, and Facilities

1. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, devices, appurtenances, facilities, and services as required for performing the demolition and removal work.

2.2 Salvage

1. The following items identified on the Contract Drawings shall be salvaged:
a. Pedestrian Benches
b. Chessboard tables
c. Recycling Bins

2. The following items identified on the Contract Drawings shall be salvaged and reinstalled as shown on contract plans:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1109
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 024100 - 4
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1
a. Blue Man Sculpture
b. Brick pavers (as identified on the Contract Drawings) c. Existing Pedestal Plaque
d. Irrigation Meter

3. The outdoor dining patio area identified for removal shall be dismantled and temporarily removed to allow construction activities. All components shall be salvaged, protected, and stored in a secure location for reinstallation after construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PRESERVATION OF REFERENCE MARKERS
A. Record the locations and designation of survey markers and monuments prior to their removal.

Provide three reference points for each survey marker and monument removed, established by a licensed civil engineer or land surveyor currently registered in the State of California.

B. Store removed markers and monuments during demolition work, and replace them upon completion of the work. Re-establish survey markers and monuments in conformance with the recorded reference points. Forward to the Engineer a letter verifying re-establishment of survey markers and monuments, signed by a licensed civil engineer or land surveyor currently registered in the State of California.

3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Perform demolition in accordance with the approved Demolition Plan B. Operational procedures shall be in accordance with the approved Demolition Plan C. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Perform demolition with small tools as much as possible. Blasting will not be permitted.

D. Cap or plug sanitary sewer in accordance with the utility owner’s standard details and instructions.

Cap and plug pipe and other conduits abandoned due to demolition, with approved type caps and plugs as required by the utility owners.

E. Backfill and compact depressions caused by excavations, demolition, and removal in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 2000 – Earthwork.

3.3 RESTORATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND FACILITIES
A. All damage to existing structures and facilities, including utilities, which are to remain in place, shall be repaired to a condition equal to that existing prior to the beginning of demolition and removal operations. The cost of repairing existing structures and facilities damaged by the Contractor’s operations shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

3.4 CLEANUP
A. Provide a clean and orderly site.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1110
CSWST2 100% Submittal / Bid Set 024100 - 5
Site Clearing
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1

3.5 SALVAGE

1. Items or materials to be salvaged are indicated on the Contract Drawings and in the Contract Specifications.

2. Protect metallic coatings on salvaged items. Remove adhering concrete from salvaged items.

3. Repair, or replace with new material, salvaged material damaged or destroyed due to Contractor’s negligence.

4. Contractor shall deliver salvaged items not identified for re-installation to the City of San Carlos Corporation Yard.

5. Salvage of Existing Brick Pavers: Contractor shall document order and placement of the existing brick pavers to be salvage. Documentation shall include photographs and sketches of the existing installation. The Contractor shall provide the Landscape Architect’s with electronic copies of photographs and sketches of the paver location in readable formats.

Placement of donor bricks shall be approved by the Parks and Recreation Director. The salvaged bricks will be reinstallation in same order.

END OF SECTION 024100

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1111
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 1
SECTION 03 10 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish, install, and remove forms for structural cast-in-place concrete including shoring and form supports.

B. Work included in this section includes formwork required for as shown on Drawings.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Cast-in Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00
B. Cast-in Place Concrete Finishing: Section 03 35 00 (including finish for concrete formed surfaces including patching and curing of concrete.

C. Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam: 31 23 00

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. None.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. The latest editions of the following references, codes, and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and formwork shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

1. “Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork,” ACI 347.

2. California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 19, latest edition.

3. “Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials” ACI 117

1.6 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES
A. Design, construct, set, and maintain formwork so as to ensure completed work within the suggested tolerance limits specified in ACI 347, Section 3.1.1.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1112
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 2

1.7 MATERIALS
A. Earth / Bedrock Forms: Unless otherwise indicated or required by the Drawings or these specifications, concrete for footings may be placed directly against vertical excavated surfaces provided the material will stand without caving and provided that minimum reinforcing steel clearances indicated on the Drawings are maintained and suitable provisions are taken to prevent raveling of top edges or sloughing of loose material from walls of excavation. Sides of excavation shall be made with a neat cut and the width made as detailed on the Drawings. Where sides are unstable or excavations are not accurately cut, overexcavate to permit placement and removal of formwork.

B. Fabricated Forms:

1. Exposed Architectural Concrete Not Otherwise Noted or Specified: Plywood, metal, metal framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials, to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practical sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.

If plywood is used, plywood shall comply with U.S. Product Standard PS 1-09 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge-sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. Thickness shall be of sufficient design and strength to hold concrete properly in place and alignment.

2. Chamfer Strips, Reveals, and Score Marks: Extruded polyvinylchloride specifically produced for concrete work; Greenstreak, Vinylex Corp., Preco Industries, Vulcan Metal Products, or approved equivalent.

3. Unexposed Concrete Not Otherwise Specified: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and one side for tight fit.

Of sufficient design and strength to hold concrete properly in place and alignment.

4. Framing: At Contractor option subject to meeting necessary strengths and surface tolerances.

C. Form Release Agents:

1. Exposed Concrete Including Surfaces to Receive Paint and Other Coatings: Chemically active type producing water insoluble soaps. Form release agents shall be delivered in manufacturer's sealed and trademarked containers and shall be guaranteed to provide clean, stain-free concrete release and not to interfere with future applied coatings and finishes. Release agents shall contain no petroleum solvents such as creosote, paraffin, waxes, or diesel oil.

2. Concealed Concrete: Contractor option except that release agents shall not interfere with bond of any applied finish.

D. Form Sealer (Wood Forms):

1. MeadowBurke “Form Sealer,” or approved equivalent, and of a type which will not interfere with bond of applied finishes.

E. Form Ties:

1. Metal, spreader type, removable to 1" from concrete face. Ties for exposed concrete shall leave smooth 1” diameter conical holes with no spalling upon form removal. Ties for

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1113
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 3
exposed concrete shall be of same type throughout Project. Wire ties and wood spreaders will not be allowed.

F. Cold Joints (Exterior Paving Slab on Grade):

1. Standard 24 GA. galvanized steel, keyed profile, sized to suit slab thickness, punched on permit passage of continuous or doweled reinforcing bars of size and spacing shown on the drawings.

PART 2 - EXECUTION

2.1 PREPARATION
A. Vertical and Horizontal Controls: Establish and maintain necessary benchmarks, lines, or controls throughout construction.

B. Secure information and provide for underfloor electric raceways, openings, sleeves, chases, reglets, pipes, recesses, nailers, anchors, ties, inserts, and similar embedded items. Coordinate with concrete work for requirements governing embedment and sleeving of pipes, raceways, and conduits.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Formwork - General: Construct wood forms of sound material, straight and rigid, thoroughly braced, mortar tight, and of such strength that the pressure of concrete and the movement of men and equipment will not displace them. Visible waves in exposed concrete surfaces after stripping of forms may result in rejection of that portion of the concrete. The design and engineering of formwork shall be the complete responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Plywood Forms for Exposed Concrete: Plywood panels shall be clean, smooth, uniform in size, and free from damaged edges or faces (including holes other than those required for form ties).

Use full panels wherever possible. Make plywood panel pattern regular and symmetrical, joints plumb or level, horizontal joints continuous. Block plywood edges, which do not occur at bearing points in order to eliminate, joint offsets.

C. Framing and Bracing: Framing, bracing, and supporting members shall be of ample size and strength to carry safely, without excessive deflection (exceeding allowable tolerances), all dead and live loads to which formwork may be subjected, and shall be spaced sufficiently close to prevent any apparent bulging or sagging of forms.

D. Form Ties: Form ties shall be of sufficient strength and used in sufficient quantities to prevent spreading of the forms. Ties for exposed concrete surfaces shall be arranged symmetrically and shall be aligned both vertically and horizontally (do not stagger), with layout pattern acceptable to Engineer based on Drawing layouts and, where not shown, in accordance with reviewed formwork layout shop drawing submittals.

E. Forms for concrete shall be constructed full height and width between indicated construction joints or emphasized joints in concrete surface and shall not be broken for pour or construction joints within these areas.

F. Construct forms no higher than 12" above top of pour or construction joint.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1114
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 4
G. Construction Joints: Construction joints shall be in accord with requirements of Section 033000:
"Cast-in-Place Concrete." Confine construction or pour joints to rustication strip locations where they occur; where rusticated joints do not occur in a surface, provide a surfaced pouring strip where construction joints intersect exposed surfaces to provide straight line at joints. Prior to subsequent pour, remove strip and tighten forms. Construction joints shall show no "overlapping" or offsetting of concrete surfaces and shall, as closely as possible, present the same appearance as butted plywood joints. Joints in a continuous line shall be straight and true.

H. Score Lines: Where "score," emphasized or rustication lines are indicated on vertical surfaces, obtain such lines by accurate placement of moldings in forms. Pieces shall be in longest lengths practical with joints mitered.

I. Arrange forms to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to concrete.

J. Form Sealer: Uncoated plywood forms for smooth Architectural Concrete shall be sealed on contact faces and edges using two (2) coats of specified form sealer in strict accord with manufacturer's directions.

K. Form Release Agent: Thoroughly clean forms and coat with release agent prior to initial use and before each reuse. Apply release agent in strict accord with manufacturer's directions and coverage recommendations avoiding starved areas or excessive applications. Apply release agents reinforcing steel is placed.

L. Reuse of Forms: Control reuse of forms for exposed surfaces to provide surface of uniform color and texture without sharp demarcation between adjacent surfaces.

M. Prior to placement of concrete, remove dirt, debris, and foreign material from forms. Leave no wood in concrete except nailers.

2.3 FALSEWORK
A. Contractor shall be fully responsible for proper strength, safety, and adequacy of formwork supports, and bearing surfaces thereof, used on and in connection with the work. Falsework shall be designed to support imposed loads without deformation, deflection, or settlement.

B. Vertical and lateral loads shall be carried to ground by falsework system, or by the completed structure after it has attained the requisite strength.

C. Erect shoring and vertical supports so that they cannot tilt or settle. Securely brace inclined shores against slipping or sliding. Cut bearing ends of shores square and with a tight fit at splices. Splices, where used, shall be secure against bending and buckling.

2.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND FALSEWORK
A. The removal of forms and falsework shall be carried out in such manner as to ensure the complete safety of the structure. Supports shall not be removed until members have sufficient strength to support safely their own weight and any superimposed loading with proper factor of safety.

B. Forms for exposed concrete surfaces shall be removed in such a manner as to preclude damage to finishes. Pinch bars and similar tools shall not be used for prying against exposed surfaces. Stripping shall commence at top edge or vertical corner where the use of wooden

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1115
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00 - 5
wedge is possible. Wedging shall be done gradually and shall be accompanied by light tapping on panels to loosen them. When free at one end, gradually loosen remaining area without jerking.

C. After concrete is placed, the concrete shall achieve a minimum of 80% compressive strength and the following minimum times shall elapse before the removal of forms or shoring:

1. Vertical Forms (Walls, Columns, and Beam Sides): 3 days

2. Side Forms (Footings, Slabs on Grade): 48 hours

3. Side Forms (Cantilevered Structural Slabs): 7 days

4. Horizontal Forms (Cantilevered Structural Slabs): 21 days D. Upon removal of forms, remove bolts, wires, clamps, rod, etc., not necessary to the work to a minimum of 1" from the surface. Conduct operations so as to eliminate the danger of rust stains from form tie materials or other unprotected ferrous materials embedded in or adjacent to exposed concrete surfaces.

END OF SECTION 03 10 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1116
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DRILLED DOWELS 03 15 00 - 1
SECTION 03 15 00 - DRILLED DOWELS AND EPOXY ANCHORS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide all material, labor, equipment, and services necessary for the installation of all dowels and/or epoxy anchors. The work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Design hole depths to achieve required test loads for the approved epoxy.

2. Drill holes in existing concrete elements for new dowels and/or epoxy anchors.

3. Insert dowels and/or epoxy anchors in holes.

B. Work included in this section includes dowels and anchors into concrete and concrete masonry units (CMU) as shown on Drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Concrete Reinforcing: 03 20 00.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete : 03 30 00
C. Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 30 00
D. Concrete Masonry Unit : 04 22 00

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Standards: Comply with the following applicable standards unless otherwise specified herein:

1. CBC - California Building Code, latest edition

2. ICC-ES - "Evaluation Report" of ICC Evaluation Service, Inc

3. ACI 315—American Concrete Institute, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”

4. ASTM A615—American Society for Testing and Materials, “Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.”

5. ASTM C109—“Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens).”

6. ASTM C309 – “Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete.”

7. AC 308 – ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for the testing of Cracked Concrete epoxy anchors in compliance with adapted ACI 318 Chapter 17 requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1117
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DRILLED DOWELS 03 15 00 - 2
B. Tests and Inspections: Tests and inspections shall be done by Testing Agency.

1. Sampling and Testing
a. Reinforcing bar dowels and/or anchors shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM A615 as specified in Section 03 20 00, “Concrete Reinforcing.”

2. Inspection
a. Special Inspection as required by CBC Chapter 17, Section 1705.3 & Table 1705.3.
b. Mixing and placing of epoxy and placing of dowels and/or epoxy anchors in the drilled holes shall be continuously inspected by a qualified inspector from the Testing Agency.

3. Dowel and/or Anchor Testing
a. Load-test 10 percent of each size of dowel set each day to tension specified:

1. Tension Test Loads: Refer to the schedules on the drawings.

2. Test loads shall be held a minimum of 10 minutes each without slip.

3. If any one dowel installed in any one day fails this test, all dowels and/or anchors installed that day shall be tested.

4. Do not apply test loads until at least seven days after placement of dowels and/or epoxy anchors, unless approved by Engineer of Record.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for Engineer’s review. Indicate placing and assembly diagrams for dowels and epoxy anchors, dimensions and details of dowel and anchor, accessories, and cover. Do not scale dimensions from structural drawings to determine lengths of dowels and anchors.

1. Review of drawings will cover only the general scheme and character of the details, but not the checking of dimensions, nor will such review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Drawings.

C. Manufacturer’s Catalog Data for epoxy anchors
D. ICC-ES Report: Submit Current ICC-ES report showing Cracked Concrete Compliance for each epoxy or adhesive system.

E. Test and Inspection Reports from qualified inspector

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1118
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DRILLED DOWELS 03 15 00 - 3

1. Anchor placement inspection report including all items referenced by ICC-ES report

2. Anchor pull testing values

1.5 STORAGE
A. Provide dry and weather tight job site storage of epoxy within temperature ranges required by manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy Adhesive

1. Simpson Strong-Tie:
a. ‘SET-3G’ Epoxy for cracked concrete (ICC- ESR-4057). b. ‘SET- 3G’ for grouted & ungrouted concrete masonry units (ICC- ESR - 4844).
c. ‘ET- 3G’ for URM / red clay brick (IAMPO-UES ER-870)

2. Hilti Fastening Systems:
a. ‘HIT-HY 200’ epoxy concrete anchors for hammer drilled holes and anchors embedded 12 inches or less (ICC-ES Report ESR-3187)
b. ‘HIT-RE 500-V3’ for hammer or core drilled holes and concrete anchors embedded more than 12 inches (ICC-ESR Report 3814) or as noted on the drawings
c. ‘HIT-HY 270’ for grouted and un-grouted CMU (ICC-ESR Reports 4143 & 4144) and URM/ clay brick (ICC-ES AC60)
B. Reinforcing Bar Dowels and/or anchors

1. ASTM A615—Grade 60
C. Threaded Rods

1. Galvanized: F1554 Gr. A36—Threaded full length with standard UNC threads.

2. Stainless steel: ASTM A193 Gr. B7
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect areas to be drilled to verify conditions of access, interferences, and existing

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1119
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set DRILLED DOWELS 03 15 00 - 4
materials.

1. Verify location of all existing mild steel reinforcement in existing concrete prior to drilling. Pacometer tests, radiograph tests, or other appropriate tests shall be required to locate steel.

2. Where drilling causes existing concrete to spall or crack, remove unsound materials and replace as directed by the Engineer.

3. Proceed with drilling following removal or replacement of unsound or damaged concrete.

B. Holes for dowels and epoxy anchors shall be drilled in existing concrete using a rotary hammer drill with a carbide-tipped drill bit.

1. Hole depth shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations as determined by the Contractor to suit the proposed epoxy and to achieve the required test loads. Minimum hold depth shall be indicated in Schedules and Details on the Drawings

2. Clean hole by blowing out with with oil-free compressed air, brushing hole out with a nylon brush and blowing out again with oil-free compressed air.

3. Mix contents of two cartridges using nozzle as required by manufacturer and inject adhesive into bottom of hole and fill hole approximately half full.

4. Insert dowel into hole containing adhesive to specified embedment depth.

Adhesive should be visible at the top of the hole.

5. Install dowel strictly in accordance with approved manufacturer’s recommendations.

6. Dowels and/or anchors shall be clean and free of dust, paint, grease, loose mill scale, rust corrosion or any other contaminant that would affect bonding of steel to epoxy.

3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protect dowels or epoxy anchors from displacement or disturbance during curing time specified by the manufacturer, or for at least 24 hours, whichever is greater.

B. Protect existing exposed surfaces and surrounding area during drilling and placing operations. Clean and/or repair marred or damaged surfaces as directed by the Architect.

3.3 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove from the site all debris resulting from the work of this Section.

END OF SECTION 03 15 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1120
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 - 1
SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section includes all materials, labor, accessories, equipment and related services to furnish and place all reinforcement in cast-in-place concrete construction, as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and all required accompanying accessories.

B. Work included in this section includes reinforcement required for concrete for the Stage Base and Seating including walls, slabs on grade and foundation as shown on Drawings.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00
B. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00
C. Cast-in-Place Concrete Finishing: Section 03 35 00 (including finish for concrete formed surfaces including patching and curing of concrete.

1.4 CODES AND STANDARDS
A. Code: Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of the 2022 California Building Code.

B. Standards: Perform all work in accordance with the latest editions and revisions of the following standards which hereby become part of this section.

1. American Concrete Institute (ACI):
a. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". b. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". c. ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete". d. ACI 117 " Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials".

2. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):
a. "Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars." b. “Suggested Specifications, Reinforcement, including Provisions for Coated Reinforcing Bars.”

3. American Welding Society (AWS):
a. 1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel".

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1121
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 - 2
b. 2. AWS D1.4 "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel".

4. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
a. “Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTM A615)
b. “Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTM A82) c. “Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement” (ASTM A706)

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths and other information corresponding to markings shown on shop drawings. Note heat identification requirements for correspondence to mill certificates.

B. Storage: Store reinforcement at the job-site in a manner to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. All reinforcing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A615 Grade 60 or ASTM A706 Grade 60, unless otherwise noted on the structural drawings.

B. Mechanical couplers:

1. Mechanical couplers shall only be used where specifically indicated on the structural drawings.

2. Mechanical couplers shall satisfy the requirements of 2022 CBC and ACI 318 Section

12.14.3 for both Type 1 and Type 2 splices as noted on the structural drawings.

3. Mechanical couplers shall have a current ICBO Evaluation Report which evidences compliance with requirements of these specifications.

4. Mechanical couplers: “Bar-Lock” as manufactured by Bar-Lock Coupler Systems or ICBO approved equivalent.

C. Headed reinforcing:

1. Headed reinforcing may only be used where specifically indicated on the structural drawings. The connection of the head to the bar shall develop the lesser of 95% of the ultimate tensile strength of 160% of the specified minimum yield strength of the bar.

2. Headed reinforcing shall have a current ICBO Evaluation Report which evidences compliance with requirements of these specifications.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1122
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 - 3

3. Headed reinforcing “HRC 100 series T-headed bars” as manufactured by “Headed Reinforcement Corp”, or approved equivalent.

D. Smooth dowels: ASTM A615 Grade 40, smooth; shop painted with iron oxide zinc chromate primer.

E. Tie Wire:

1. Black annealed wire, 16 gauge or heavier.

F. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for supporting, spacing and fastening reinforcement in place:

1. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use wood, brick, and other unacceptable materials.

2. For slabs on grade use supports of precast concrete blocks of size sufficient to resist settlement into soil, but not less than 3 inches square, with embedded plastic coated wires.

3. For exposed-to-view concrete surfaces, where legs of supports are in contact with forms, provide supports with either hot-dip galvanized or plastic protected legs. For this project, soffits and faces of slabs and beams shall be considered as exposed-toview unless specifically noted otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication of reinforcing bars shall conform to required shape and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with the CRSI Manual and ACI 315. Fabrication shall not commence until shop drawings have been reviewed and returned by the Engineer as appropriate. In case of fabricating errors, do not rebend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material.

B. Unacceptable materials: Reinforcement with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work:

1. Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding specified fabrication tolerances.

2. Bends or kinks not indicated on Drawings or final Shop Drawings.

3. Bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other causes.

C. Welded splices shall be used only where specifically indicated on the structural drawings.

When used, the splice shall have bars butted and welded to develop in tension at least 100 percent of the specified tensile strength of the bar.

D. Welding of stirrups, ties, inserts or other similar elements to longitudinal reinforcing bars shall not be permitted.

3.2 INSPECTION AND SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Contractor to examine the substrate, formwork, and the conditions at which concrete reinforcement is to be placed, and correct conditions which would prevent proper and timely

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1123
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 - 4
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been obtained.

B. Contractor shall submit the following to the Special Inspector for all supplied reinforcing steel:

1. Certificates of compliance with specified standards for reinforcing bars.

2. Welding electrodes.

3. Reinforcing bar coating.

4. Certified mill test reports including physical and chemical analysis.

C. Special Inspector will:

1. Collect test reports and certificates of compliance.

2. Review test reports and certificates of compliance for conformance with Contract Documents.

3. Select random samples of reinforcing steel for testing by Testing Laboratory, at the discretion of the Special Inspector.

D. Testing Laboratory will test random samples of reinforcing steel selected by the Special Inspector for compliance with strength, ductility and chemical requirements of ASTM A615 or A706.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the specified standards for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified.

B. Clean reinforcement to remove loose rust and mill scale, earth, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required.

D. Place reinforcement to obtain the required minimum coverages for concrete protection.

Arrange, space, and securely tie bar supports together with 16 gauge wire to hold reinforcement accurately in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so that twisted ends are directed away from exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Provide sufficient numbers of supports and of strength to carry reinforcement. Do not place reinforcing bars more than 2" beyond the last leg of any continuous bar support. Do not use supports as bases for runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.

F. Splices shall only be made at locations and by the method indicated on the structural drawings. Any proposed alternate location or method must be submitted in writing to the Engineer for approval.

G. Welding:

1. Welding is not permitted unless specifically detailed on the structural drawings.

2. Employ shielded metal arc, gas metal arc or flux cored arc method and conform to requirements of AWS D1.4 using qualified procedures.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1124
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE REINFORCING 03 20 00 - 5

3. Welding shall not be done within two bar diameters of any bent portion of a bar which has been bent cold.

4. Welding of crossing bars is not permitted.

H. Special Inspector will:

1. Inspect placement of reinforcement for conformance with the Contract Documents as required by CBC Section 1704 and Table 1705.3.

END OF SECTION 03 20 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1125
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-1
SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install cast-in-place concrete required for the Project as shown on the Drawings and specified herein.

This Section also includes:

1. Concrete building curbs, grade beams, walls, piers and mat slab.

2. Curing of formed concrete surfaces.

3. Installation of anchor bolts, hangers, anchors, reglets, plates, inserts, and miscellaneous metal or other materials embedded in concrete.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00 (including erection, stripping, and removal).

B. Concrete Reinforcing: Section 03 20 00.

C. Concrete Finishing: Section 03 35 00 (including finish for concrete building formed surfaces including patching and curing of concrete.

D. Expansion Anchors, Screws and Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Section 05 05 19.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Architectural Concrete: The term "Architectural Concrete" where used herein shall mean concrete normally exposed to view.

1.5 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. The following references, codes, and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and concrete work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

B. "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete", ACI 318, latest edition.

C. California Building Code, 2022 Edition, Chapter 19.

D. "Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials", ACI 117

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1126
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, pigments, joint fillers, manufactured grouts, curing materials and vapor retarder.

C. Delivery tickets for each batch of concrete delivered, bearing the following information.

1. Mix identification.

2. Weight of cement, aggregate, water and admixtures, and aggregate size.

D. Samples: See Section 03 35 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Finishing. Provide panel using proposed mix design for Architectural Concrete or integrally colored concrete. Panels shall be cast, reviewed by Owner and Architect.

E. Quality Control:

1. Mix design for each concrete mix.

2. Laboratory test reports for concrete mixes.

3. Material certificates for concrete materials, including cements, aggregates and admixtures.

4. Statement of installer/finisher qualifications for Architectural Concrete.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 306(R)-16, "Cold Weather Concreting." B. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with ACI 305(R)-20, "Hot Weather Concreting."

1.7 FINISH
A. Refer to specification Section 03 33 00 for finishing cast concrete after formwork is stripped.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Cement: ASTM C 150-20, Type II. Cement shall be of same brand, type, and source throughout Project. Where aggregates are potentially reactive, use low alkali cement.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618 CLASS C OR F, with the following requirements:

1. Fly ash shall be added to all concrete at a 20% minimum up to a 35% maximum rate of replacement by weight of the scheduled amount of cement.

2. Modified ASTM requirements:
a. Loss on Ignition (L.O.I.): Maximum 1%
b. Sulfur Trioxide (SO3) shall not exceed 3% by weight.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1127
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3
c. Water requirement – maximum: 100% of control
d. R = Ca O minus 5%
Fe203
R = Sulfate Resistance = 0.75 maximum
Ca O Percentage fly ash oxide analysis
Fe2O3
C. Normal Weight Concrete Aggregate: Aggregate shall be 1" x #4 coarse, clean, uncoated, processed aggregate containing no clay, mud, loam or foreign matter, as follows:

1. Crushed stone, processed from natural rock or stone.

2. Natural or crushed gravel. Do not use pit, bank run, or pea gravel.

Conform to ASTM C-33 uniformly graded, 3/4-inch (19-mm) maximum aggregate size.

Source shall be constant unless 10 days' prior notice is given for approval after rechecking of the mix design.

D. Water: Clean and potable, free from impurities detrimental to concrete.

E. Admixtures: The use of admixtures shall be subject to prior approval of the Engineer per ACI 318-14 Section 26.4.1.4 Admixtures. Calcium Chloride, Thiocyanates, and admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions by mass of cementitious material are not permitted.

Batch admixtures in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D

3. Air-Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C260/C260M-10a

4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type G.

5. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

6. Color Admixtures: see Section 03 35 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Finishing

7. Certification: Prior to preparation of mix designs, submit written conformance to above requirements and the chloride ion content of the admixture(s).

F. Expansion Joint Fillers:

1. Exposed Fillers (On-Grade Slabs and similar flatwork where joints are not otherwise noted or specified): ASTM D 1751-18, preformed, non-extruding strips, 3/8" thick unless otherwise noted, precut to proper size.

G. Granular Fill: Open graded gravel with maximum ¾-inch (19 mm) aggregate size conforming to Class 2 Aggregate Base as defined in Caltrans Standard Specifications Section 26.

H. Sand: ASTM C33, uniformly graded, clean sand, free from excessive fines, organic materials, and other deleterious substances.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1128
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4
I. Non-Shrink Grout (Metallic): Euclid Chemical Co. "Firmix," Master Builders "Embeco 636," Sonnenborn-Contech "Ferrolith G," or approved equivalent, premixed, metallic grout, conforming to Corps of Engineers Spec. CRD-C-621.

J. Non-Shrink Grout (Non-Metallic): Euclid Chemical Co. "Euco N-S,", LM "Crystex," UPCO "Upcon," U.S. Grout Corp. "Five Star," Master Builders "Masterflow 713," or approved equivalent, non-metallic, non-staining, premixed grout having a compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 6,800 psi, non-shrink at all flow levels.

K. Curing Compounds: Conform to requirements of Concrete Finishes Section L. Crystalline Permeability Reducing Admixture for below grade slabs and walls: Sika WT-240 P or equal to be compatible with the waterproof membrane.

M. Waterstop: Products listed are by Sika Southern Metal and are specified to establish the required level of performance, quality, and appearance.

1. Provide dumbbell/center bulb waterstops Sika Southern Metal Catalog Number 28DBCB, or approved equivalent.

2.2 MIXES
A. Mix Designs:

1. Mix designs for concrete shall be Contractor-designed at contractor expense.

Designs shall be prepared by a qualified agency approved by the Engineer. Submit mix designs for review by the Engineer at least 2 weeks prior to placing any concrete.

Submissions shall completely indicate brands, types, and quantities of admixtures included. If concrete is to be placed by pumping, recommendations of ACI Committee 304 shall be followed.
a. All concrete to be normal weight unless otherwise noted b. Minimum compressive strength, f'c as shown on the drawings General Structural Notes, Section 03 30 10
c. Where design compressive strength is specified as 2,500 psi, no special inspection is required
d. Maximum slump: 4"
e. Maximum water to cement ratio: 0.42

2. Mix designs shall be proportioned in accord with CBC Section 1905.3 "Proportioning on the Basis of Field Experience and/or Trial Mixtures" & ACI 301 & ACI 318 Section

26.4.4.1. Submit mix designs for each class of concrete for review. If trial batches are used, the mix design shall be prepared by an independent testing laboratory and shall achieve a compressive strength 1,200 psi higher than the specified strength.

2.3 MAT SLAB VAPOR BARRIER & BASE PREPARATION

A. See Architectural drawings and details.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MIXING

A. Concrete shall be ready mixed per ASTM C 94-16(b). Equipment shall be adequate for the purpose and kept in good mechanical condition at all times.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1129
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5
B. The rate of delivery, haul time, mixing time, and hopper capacity shall be such that mixed concrete delivered shall be placed in the forms within 90 minutes or 300 revolutions of the drum from the time of introduction of cement and water to the mixer. Any interruption in placing in excess of 90 minutes or 300 revolutions will cause shutdown of the work for the day and the wasting of any mixed concrete remaining in hoppers or mixers. In case such interruption occurs, the Contractor shall provide construction joints where and as directed and cut concrete back to such line, cleaning forms and reinforcing as herein specified. Delivery tickets shall show departure time from plants. Revolution counters shall be set at "0" and shall commence to operate when drum revolution begins after introduction of all ingredients into the mixer.

C. No water shall be added to the mix after the initial introduction of mixing water for the batch except when, on arrival at the job site, the slump of the concrete is less than that specified. In this case, additional water may be added from the truck system to bring the slump within required limits. The drum or blades shall then be turned an additional 30 revolutions until the mix is uniform.

D. Mixers shall be equipped with an automatic device for recording number of revolutions of drum or blades prior to completion of mixing operation.

E. Concrete shall be kept continuously agitated until discharged into the hopper at the job site.

F. Contractor shall note that the appearance of concrete surfaces depends upon uniform color and texture within any one area and between adjacent areas and shall exercise strict batching and mixing controls to achieve this end.

3.2 PLACING
A. Per Geotechnical Engineer report, because of the previous improvements at the site, undocumented fill may be existed on site. If encountered and not removed by design cut, the existing fill should generally be removed and replaced with engineered fill. It is critical that the footing excavations not be allowed to dry before placing concrete. If shrinkage cracks appear in the footing excavations, the excavations should be thoroughly moistened to close all the cracks prior to concrete placement.

B. Notify Engineer 72 hours (3 working days) minimum prior to placing of any concrete.

C. Thoroughly wet absorbent forms before concrete is placed. Aggregate base/sand beds for slabs on grade shall be moist but not saturated when concrete is placed.

D. Placing of concrete shall be done immediately after mixing. No concrete shall be placed or used after it has begun to set and no re-tempering will be allowed. The method used in placing shall be such that concrete is conveyed to place and deposited without separation of the ingredients. Place no concrete with a free unconfined fall in excess of five (5) feet.

Concrete shall not be allowed to cascade through reinforcing steel in such a manner as to promote segregation. Do not support runways on reinforcing steel. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

E. Where concrete slab surfaces have obtained 75% of their 28 day compressive strength (56 day for fly ash replacement concrete) and such surfaces are to be used for construction traffic, including concrete buggies and other conveyances, such surfaces shall be protected over traffic lanes by not less than 1 layer of waterproof kraft paper and 1 layer of 5/8" (min.) plywood.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1130
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6
F. Remove splash or accumulations of hardened or partially hardened concrete. Protect contact faces of forms for exposed concrete from splash during placement of adjacent concrete.

Place concrete containing piping and electric raceways in a manner that will prevent damage to them.

G. Distribution of concrete shall be even and continuous and no placement joints shall show.

Before a placement is started, make certain that adequate equipment, workers, and concrete will be available to place in cycles, which will permit proper and thorough integration of each layer of concrete. Upon stopping of a placement, the top surface shall be level.

H. Place no concrete for any element until reinforcing for same is fastened in place nor until forms are complete. Place no concrete before work that is to be embedded has been set.

Notify other crafts so that they may deliver anchors, inserts, etc., or other work to be embedded in ample time and also notify them when their assistance in setting is required. Do not disturb reinforcing or other materials that have been set in place.

I. Comply with ACI 318-14 chapter 26.8-Embedments for requirements governing embedded conduits and pipe. Sleeves and inserts will be provided and set under other Sections of the work.

J. Remove debris, mud, and water from places to receive concrete. Verify depths of any depressed slab conditions for suitability with type and method of surfacing to be applied over concrete.

K. Remove concrete splash and/or grout from exposed surfaces and from surfaces that will receive painter's finish.

L. Place no concrete in water unless written permission has been obtained from Engineer as to proposed procedures.

M. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents.

3. Do not use chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in design mixtures.

N. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 305(R) and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.3 VIBRATION AND CONSOLIDATION
A. Thoroughly consolidate all concrete by means of internal mechanical vibrators. Such consolidation shall be produced as will be obtained by placing the vibrator- directly in

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1131
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7
concrete at 18" - 30" intervals for a period of 5 to 15 seconds and withdrawing slowly or as directed, depending on the consistency of the concrete. One vibrator will be required for each location where simultaneous placing takes place, to ensure thorough vibrating of all sections. Provide sufficient spare vibrators on the job so as to have them readily available in case any vibrator in use should suddenly cease to function properly. When spare vibrators are employed, provide additional spares. Under no condition shall vibrator be placed against reinforcing steel or attached to forms. Do not use vibrators to transport material.

B. Vibrators shall be of the flexible immersion type having a frequency of not less than 8,000 RPM. Use and type of vibrator shall conform to ACI 309, "Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete."
C. Spading will not be permitted on exposed concrete surfaces.

D. Voids and rock pockets shall be eliminated. Voids and rock pockets occurring in exposed concrete may subject that portion to rejection.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
A. Placement of construction joints and the manner in which they are provided for shall be only as approved by the Engineer or as shown on the Drawings. Construction joints shall be as few as possible and will not be permitted simply to save forms.

B. Under no condition will construction joints be permitted in Architectural Concrete surfaces other than where specifically shown and specified. See Concrete Formwork Section.

C. Clean and roughen construction joints by removing entire surface and exposing clean solidly embedded aggregate by means of sandblasting or other approved methods. Clean forms and reinforcing of drippings, debris, etc. Thoroughly consolidate initial pour with grout so that no variation in texture will occur in Architectural Concrete surfaces.

3.5 CURING CONCRETE
A. Curing Concrete shall conform to Section 90-7 “Curing Concrete” of the Caltrans State Standard Specifications and ACI 318 Section 26.5.3. The Curing Compound Method, Curing Compound Method or Forms in Place Method are acceptable methods. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 305(R) for hot-weather protection during curing.

Concrete surfaces exposed to the atmosphere within 7 days of placement shall be protected and cured per Caltrans State Standard Specifications, Section 90-7 “Curing Concrete” and as necessary until specified design strength has been achieved. At greater rates of cement replacement with fly ash the early strength and setting for flat work can be delayed, and in some cases, the 28-day design strength may have to be exceeded to 56 days or more. In this case, the construction needs, and schedules may impact the cement replacement percentage.

Care should be taken to ensure that proper curing is maintained for concretes in which fly ash has been substituted for a portion of the Portland cement.

B. If forms are permitted to be removed prior to expiration of curing period, exposed concrete surfaces shall be kept continuously wet by means of fog sprays or non-staining cotton or burlap mats kept moist or by approved curing compound. Application of curing compounds shall conform to requirements of Concrete Finishes Section 03 35 00.

3.6 EXPANSION JOINT FILLERS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1132
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8
A. Preformed Filler Joints: Place filler material so that top of surface is level and aligned uniformly 1/4" below adjacent concrete surface. Provide where walks abut vertical surfaces, at not over 24 ft. centers horizontally in paving and at other locations so noted on the Drawings. Follow Drawings for pattern where indicated; where not indicated, coordinate locations with Engineer before proceeding.

3.7 GROUTING
A. Where grouting is required and such grout is exposed in the finished work, use non-metallic, non-shrink grout only.

3.8 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests and inspections shall comply with CBC Section 1903 and shall be performed by qualified individuals, engineering companies, or testing laboratories who shall perform those special inspections required by Table 1705.3 of the latest California Building Code, those tests and inspections specified below, and other such tests and inspections as the Engineer and Owner may require establishing the acceptability of the work.

B. Testing and inspection services shall be retained by the Owner at its expense, except that when tests or inspections reveal failure of materials to meet contract requirements, costs for subsequent tests and inspections will be deducted from the moneys due the Contractor.

Excessive inspection time required by Contractor's failure to provide sufficient workers or to pursue properly the progress of the work shall likewise be deducted from the Contract Price.

C. Furnish material and handling for test cylinders and any other samples which testing agency requires for analysis of concrete work.

D. Batch Plant Inspection: Concrete is subject to batch plant inspection as per CBC 1703.5.2.

E. Compression Strength Tests to determine Strength and Durability of Concrete shall be provided per ACI 318-14 Chapter 26.12. Concrete test samples: samples for concrete tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 172. Test cylinders shall be cured under conditions not more favorable than the most unfavorable conditions for portions of concrete which specimens represent. Casting and curing on test cylinders shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Testing of samples shall be carried out by an independent testing agency meeting the requirements of ASTM C 1077. Concrete shown to be defective shall be removed and replaced. Cost of core tests, repairs and removal, and replacement of defective concrete shall be paid by Contractor.

Compressive Strength Tests on concrete shall comply with the following:

1. Frequency of concrete sampling: Samples for concrete compressive strength tests of each class of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once per day or per batch, nor less than once for every 150 yd³ of concrete, nor less than once for every 5000 ft² surface area for slabs or walls. A sample shall consist of four standard cylinders, one to be tested at 7 days, one to be tested at 14 days, and the remainder to be tested at 28 days, as required.

2. Acceptance of concrete shall be based on strength test results of standard cured cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 31 and tested at 28 days in accordance with ASTM C 39. Strength test results are defined as the average of a minimum of two specimens.

Additional specimens for testing may be made at contractor's option and expense.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1133
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9

3. When cylinders are made, tests of slump, air content, temperature, and density shall be made and recorded with the strength test results.

4. Strength of each concrete class shall be deemed satisfactory when the following criterion is met:
a. No individual compressive-strength test result (i.e. the average of two cylinders minimum) falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

5. When compressive strength tests indicate low strength, follow procedure in ACI 318 Section 26.12.4 investigation of low-strength test results.

6. Submit certified test report of cylinders to engineer.

F. Slump Tests: Slump tests will be performed as per ASTM C143/C143M-20 (slump cone) at time of taking test cylinders.

G. Owners 's testing agency will supervise preparation and selection of samples taken at job site.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1134
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE FINISHING
03 35 00 - 1
SECTION 03 35 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE FINISHING
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section includes all materials, labor, accessories, equipment and related services to finish cast-in-place concrete construction, as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and all required accompanying accessories.

B. Work included in this section includes finishing required for concrete including walls, slabs on grade and foundation concrete as shown on Drawings.

C. Work include in this section includes water repellent sealer treatment applied to exterior exposed concrete walls, slab and curbs and concrete slabs under pavers.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Cast-in Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Architectural Concrete: The term "Architectural Concrete" where used herein shall mean concrete normally exposed to view.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions Section 4.19.

B. Product Data: Submit for any specified color treatments.

B. Samples:

1. Architect's Selection: Where colors, etc. are specified to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range, submit full range for Architect's use.

2. Specified Materials and Colors: Submit samples of specified color treatments.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reference Standards apply to this Section and shall be the most current edition of the following:

1. Comply with Reference Standards of Section 03 30 00, Cast-In Place Concrete.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Comply with air pollution regulations of governing authorities for sandblasting activities and operations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1135
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE FINISHING
03 35 00 - 2
C. Concrete Finishing: Supervised and performed by workmen experienced in concrete finishing operations and capable of demonstrating completion of finishing projects of similar scope and complexity, including the finishing of blast furnace slag replacement concrete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Unless otherwise noted, integral color additives shall be as follows: 2 LBS Lamp Black / CY.

Verify integral color concrete mix design w/ Owner’s Representative and Architect.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Water-Based Silane/Siloxane Water Repellent Treatment:

1. Use water-based silane/siloxane water repellent for concrete and most masonry and stucco surfaces to protect them from water penetration without altering the natural appearance.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Water Absorption Reduction (Brick) per ASTM C 67: Greater than 89 percent. b. Water Absorption Reduction (CMU) per ASTM C 140: Greater than 93 percent. c. Water Absorption Reduction (Mortar) per ASTM D 6532: Greater than 98 percent. d. Water Vapor Transmission WVT per ASTM D 6490: Minimum 4 perms. e. VOC Content: Less than 30 g/L.

3. Approved Products:
a. "Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane PD " OR EQUAL; PROSOCO, Inc. (800- 255-4255) (Basis of Design).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PRECONDITIONS
A. Examine surfaces to receive finishing operations and conditions under which they are to be applied or conducted. Correct unsatisfactory surfaces or conditions prior to commencement of finishing operations.

1. Lines and Levels: Ensure that surfaces have been brought to proper lines and levels to produce finish surfaces within specified tolerance and at required elevations.

3.2 WORKMANSHIP
A. Formed Surfaces: Remove all fins and other projections, fill and patch depressions and plug form tie holes in permanently exposed areas, leave "As-cast" unless otherwise shown or specified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1136
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE FINISHING
03 35 00 - 3

1. Grouting of Form Tie Holes: After installation of plugs, fill depression with grout, strike flush with adjacent surfaces.

a. Grout Color: Match adjacent concrete color.

2. Protruding Formwork Nails, Staples, etc. cut off flush with concrete surface, grind smooth.

B. Slabs: Finish monolithically unless otherwise shown or specified, ensure that an even joint is maintained between successive concrete pours.

1. Levels: As shown on drawings or as directed by Architect.

2. Drainage: Slope slabs uniformly to provide positive drainage into floor drains, gutters, etc. where indicated on drawings.

3. Finishes: As shown on drawings and as specified below.

B. Edge Finishing: provide edge finishing (radius or chamfer) as indicated on drawings. a. Radius Corners: Provide ½” troweled radius corners on all exposed edges as shown on plans. Verify and coordinate exposed radius corner with Architectural documents. b. Chamfer: Provide a 3/4” cast-in-place chamfer. Chamfer shall provide a uniform flat edge, at 45 degrees relative to cast concrete surfaces. Verify and coordinate exposed chamfer with Architectural documents.

E. Tolerances: Finish concrete to smooth, even surfaces with no abrupt variations, within the following tolerances:

1. Slabs: In accordance with Reference Standard ACI 302.1R. Verify Flatness and Levelness of slabs using ASTM 1155 or ASTM E-1486 (Waviness Index) equivalent.

3.3 FINISH DESCRIPTIONS
A. Surface Finish of As-Cast Exposed to View Concrete: Concrete shall have uniform as-cast surface with minimal additional finishing being anticipated or required.

1. Patch voids larger than 3/4 in. wide or 1/2 in. deep, surface blemishes will not be filled.

2. Remove projections larger than 1/8 in. by grinding without marring surface.

3. Fill tie holes and strike flush with adjacent surfaces, except as otherwise noted.

4. Surface tolerance Class A as specified in ACI 117.

5. Mockup of concrete surface appearance and texture required.

B. Broom Finish: After floating operations have been completed and concrete has sufficiently hardened, lightly steel trowel slabs to remove irregularities and, prior to concrete becoming

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1137
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE FINISHING
03 35 00 - 4
non-plastic, Smooth Broom Finish slabs using broom not less than twenty- four (24) inches wide to produce a finished surface free of small pockets, disturbed aggregate or other defects. Obtain EBRPD and Architect approval of sample for texture of final finish before application.

1. Brooming: Produce even texture from edge-to-edge, lap adjacent strokes slightly to produce uniform pattern, perpendicular to the direction of traffic flow unless otherwise shown.

3.5 TOOLING
A. Layout: Locate score lines or control joints where shown on drawings or as directed by Architect.

B. Workmanship: Unless otherwise shown, use tool to produce a groove 6 mm (1/4 inch) wide at the top and 13 mm (1/2 inch) deep with rounded corners. Lines shall be straight, parallel and/or square, with square intersections unless otherwise shown.

C. Edges: Round edges of slabs with tool to match score line corners.

3.6 PATCHING
A. General: Minor defects in Cast-In-Place Concrete that do not affect its structural properties or weathertight integrity may be patched if approved by the Architect.

1. Approval: Only defects that, in the opinion of the Architect, can be restored to the specified quality of finish and have a reasonable appearance match may be patched.

B. Workmanship: Within three days after form removal, when approved by Architect, fill and patch all rock pockets, "honeycomb" voids and other surface defects to achieve specified finish quality.

1. Filling and Patching: Remove any loose material, thoroughly wet area to be patched, fill with fine sand-cement grout and patching mortar, compact and screed to achieve proper levels.
a. Form Tie Holes: Unless otherwise shown, fill and patch all form tie holes which would be exposed to view.

2. Finishing: Match adjacent surfaces and levels.

C. Final Approval: Areas that have been patched will be re-inspected by the Architect. If the patching has not, in the opinion of the Architect, restored the specified quality and appearance of the surface, the concrete shall be removed to nearest control joints, replaced and refinished.

3.7 CONCRETE WATER REPELLENT SEALER
A. PREPARATION

1. Verify surfaces to receive water repellent treatment are clean, free of efflorescence, oil, grease, or other foreign matter detrimental to application.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1138
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CAST-IN-PLACE

CONCRETE FINISHING
03 35 00 - 5

2. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove grease or oil with a solvent, effective alkaline cleaner, or detergent as instructed by water repellent manufacturer.

Scrub surfaces with water.

3. Allow surfaces to dry prior to application.

4. Protect all surrounding areas as recommended by the manufacturer or as directed by the Architect.
a. Windows: Windows shall be protected from contact with materials by masking with polyethylene or other approved techniques. b. All polished stone, metal, or non-masonry surfaces shall be protected from contact with the material by masking with polyethylene. c. Masonry surfaces must be in good repair. All new construction or repointed surfaces must be allowed to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to application. Surfaces must be completely dry.

5. Verify all windows, exterior intakes and air conditioning vents are covered and air handling equipment is shut down during application and until vapors have dissipated.

6. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water-repellent treatment have been installed and cured.

B. WATER- Based Silane/Siloxane Water Repellent Treatment APPLICATION (VERTICAL

APPLICATION)

1. Test each surface and/or material to be treated to ensure compatibility and water repellent treatment results. The surface to be treated must be clean and free of all foreign matter and as dry as possible to ensure proper penetration of water repellent treatment.

2. Do NOT dilute water repellent treatment.

3. Proceed with application of water repellent treatment in an orderly manner once application rate has been tested; work from bottom to top of each scaffold width and from one end of each elevation to the other.

4. Apply water repellent treatment wet-on-wet to vertical visibly dry and absorbent surfaces and comply with manufacturer's written instructions; use brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's option.

5. Preferred method of application is with low pressure, airless diaphragm-type spray equipment or with a heavily saturated roller or brush. Apply in coverage rate as recommended by manufacturer for type of material.

6. Spray Application:
a. Apply water repellent treatment from bottom- up using a wet-on-wet application, creating a 4 to 8 inch rundown below the spray contact point.

Let the first application penetrate for 5 to 10 minutes then reapply. Apply in accordance with manufacturer recommendation. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi.

7. Roller or Brush Application:
a. Thoroughly saturate the surface uniformly with water repellent treatment for 5 to 10 minutes. Avoid excessive overlapping. Backroll or brush out heavy runs and drips that do not penetrate.

C. PROTECTION

1. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive water repellent treatment. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately, by manufacturer approved method.

2. Protect treated surfaces from rain for 6 hours.

3. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by A/E.

END OF SECTION 03 35 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1139
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 1
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
SECTION 034801 – SITE PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Precast concrete benches.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 03 Section 033000 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for footers and foundations for precast units.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 033000 Cast-in-Place Concrete (custom bench) B. Section 057210 Landscape Metal Fabrications (custom bench) C. Section 064013 Landscape Woodwork (custom bench)
D. Section 099623 Anti-graffiti Coating (custom bench)
E. Section 323300 Site Furnishings (custom bench)

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s product data, installation instructions, use limitations and recommendations for each material used.

B. Mix Design:

1. Submit concrete mix design. Pre-caster may use their own laboratory facilities, if adequate and the services of a technician regularly in his employ for such duties.

Confirm mix designs by tests on trial mixes made with proposed materials. Provide mix design and trial mixes sufficiently in advance so that seven-day compression test results will be available prior to first production of precast units.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Submit large scale Shop Drawings for fabrication and erection of all parts of the work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1140
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 2
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
a. Provide plans, elevations, grading information, surrounding context, and details of anchorage, reinforcement, connections, lifting devices, and accessory items. b. Provide installation templates for work installed by others. c. Provide information on erection sequence with plans coded to numbered precast units.
d. Contractor/ Pre-caster shall verify in field dimensions of proposed pre-cast concrete units before preparing shop drawings.
e. Shop Drawings shall include design, reinforcement, anchors, and calculations stamped and certified by a Professional Engineer in the State of California.

D. Erection Drawings:

Provide detailed Drawings, properly checked and coordinated with existing conditions showing precast design including supports, anchors, connections and attachments. For items installed in work by others, include setting diagrams, templates, and instructions.

Erection Drawings may be incorporated into Shop Drawings.

E. Samples:

1. Initial Selection Samples: Submit individual cube samples for each precast concrete fabrication showing complete range of colors, textures, and finishes available for each precast color and texture required for the Project.

2. Verification Samples: After approval of cube samples, submit minimum 12 in. x 12 in. samples of each finish that is to be exposed in the finished work, showing full range of color and finish variations expected.

3. Proposed samples shall be fabricated and shall demonstrate the precast concrete producer/fabricator’s ability to closely match the color, texture, and finish of the Owner’s mock-up prior to award of Contract. Samples shall be inspected at the Site and shall be preserved and maintained as standards of quality.

F. Manufacturer’s Certification:

1. Prior to beginning work, manufacturer shall submit written certification that they have sufficient stone, sand, and cement on-site to complete the entire project, producing panels which are uniform in appearance.

G. Test Reports:

1. Submit certified reports for tests required.

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Testing by Pre-caster:

1. Supply and place concrete of specified strength and quality. Provide and pay for compression tests. Submit results of tests to Architect. Provide a minimum of one test for each day’s pour, with each test consisting of four cylinders, one (1) of which to be broken at 7-days, two (2) at 28-days, and one (1) at a time selected

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1141
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 3
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
by Pre-caster. Sampling, molding, curing and testing of the cylinders shall conform with ASTM C 31 and ASTM C 39, under laboratory conditions.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm that assumes responsibility for engineering architectural precast concrete units to comply with performance requirements. This responsibility includes preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.

1. Participates in APA's "Plant Certification Program for Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products" and is designated an APA-certified plant.

B. Provide precast concrete work conforming to ACI 318, Chapter 16, and PCI MNL-122. Plant quality control program shall comply with PCI MNL-117.

C. Pre-caster/Installer: Firms with a minimum of 5 years successful experience in fabrication of architectural precast concrete units required for this Project. Pre-caster must have sufficient production capacity to produce, transport, and deliver required units without causing delay in the work.

D. Maintain profiles shown without increasing or decreasing sizes of members or altering alignment shown.

E. Final acceptance of each member will be subject to approval by the Architect as based upon full conformance with these Specifications. Members shall be made accessible and fully visible to the Architect for inspection at the plant prior to shipment and/or at the site after shipment.

Rejected members shall be immediately removed from the site and plant storage areas.

1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Precast Concrete Compressive Strength: Minimum 5,000 psi at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39
B. Water Absorption by Weight of Concrete: 5% maximum for individual units and 4-1/2% maximum, as an average.

C. Tolerances: Architectural precast concrete units shall be true to dimension, not more than 1/16 in. in 10 feet out of plane, and completely without twists or bends. Arrises shall be sharp, whole, and clearly defined. Dimensions shall be held within a tolerance of plus zero (0) and minus 1/8 in.

D. Design: The design of the units shall also take into account stresses induced due to shrinkage, fabrication, handling, and erection of the units.

1.7 HANDLING, TRANSPORATION, AND STORAGE
A. Deliver, store and handle precast in strict compliance with fabricator’s instructions and recommendations and industry standards. Protect from all possible damage. Lift and support units only at designated lifting points as shown on approved shop drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1142
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 4
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
B. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, but minimize on-site storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORMWORK
A. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 347, and with PCI requirements. Provide form facing materials of metal, plastic, wood, or other acceptable material that is nonreactive with concrete and will produce required finish surfaces.

B. Construct formwork accurately, mortar-tight, and of sufficient strength to withstand pressures due to concrete placement, and temperature changes.

C. Coating: Coat forms with approved non-staining form release agent that will not interfere with adhesion of sealants, glazing compound, insulation adhesives or applied finishes.

Do not use castor oil or form release agents containing castor oil or retardants.

D. Formwork Joints: Seal joints in formwork with gaskets, silicone sealant, or other method approved by the Architect to provide acceptable finish.

E. Forms may be designed with a draft of 1/8 in. in 12in., and all forms may have 1/8 in. radius corners to facilitate removal and reduce breakage.

F. Clean forms thoroughly after each use and prior to reuse. Check forms for tightness at each usage.

2.2 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 775 galvanized.

B. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel
C. Reinforcing Supports: Provide reinforcing supports, including bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for fastening, spacing, and supporting reinforcing.

D. Place reinforcement dowels securely and accurately as shown on the approved submittals. Attach connection hardware rigidly to forms.

E. Detail and fabricate reinforcement in conformance with ACI 315 and ACI 315R.

F. Place reinforcement on accessory bolsters and chairs with plastic tips of color to match finished concrete. Accessories shall be galvanized and have plastic tips. Splicing of bars shall be as specified in ACI 318.

G. Provide minimum 1 in. coverage of reinforcing steel, including ties. Assembly and placing of reinforcing shall ensure minimum coverage being maintained during the placing, consolidating, and curing of concrete.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, white color

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1143
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 5
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
B. Water: clean, clear, potable and free from deleterious chemicals and substances.

C. Coarse Aggregate: Except as modified in PCI 117, ASTM C 33, specially selected for color, supplied from a single source for entire Project. Provide aggregate washed, clean, hard and durable, inert, material, free of staining or deleterious material.

1. Aggregate Gradation and Color: As required to match approved sample.

D. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33 manufactured sand of same material as coarse aggregate, unless approved otherwise by Architect.

1. Aggregate Gradation and Color: As required to match approved sample.

E. Coloring Admixtures: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored waterreducing admixtures, temperature stable, non-fading, and alkali resistant.

F. Air-Entraining Admixtures: ASTM C 260, manufacturer and product as approved by Architect.

G. Water Reducing Admixtures: ASTM C 494, Type A, manufacturer and product as approved by Architect.

2.4 GROUT MATERIALS
A. Non-Metallic, Non-Shrink Grout: Provide one of the following, or Architect approved equal:

1. Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.

2. Masterflow 713; Master Builders.

3. Five Star Grout; U.S. Grout Corp.

2.5 CONCRETE MIX
A. Submit proposed concrete mix proportions to Architect for approval prior to fabrication.

Show batch weights, gradations, specific gravity, absorption of aggregates, slump, fresh unit weight and air content. Verify mix design and provide four (4) compression tests, two (2) at 7-days, and two (2) at 28-days, on 6 in. diameter x 12 in. high cylinders filled with proposed mix materials in proposed proportions.

B. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch of field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the project for each type of concrete required, complying with ACI 318.

C. Concrete Mix: Standard weight concrete consisting of specified Portland cement, aggregates, admixtures, pigment, and water to produce the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi minimum at 28-days

2. Total Air Content: Not less than 4% nor more than 6%.

3. Slump: 3 in. minimum, 5 in. maximum.

D. Submit written reports to Architect of proposed mix for each type of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of precast unit production. Do not begin concrete production until mixes and evaluation have been reviewed by Architect.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1144
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 6
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
E. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

Laboratory test data for revised mix designs and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in the work.

F. Admixtures: Use admixtures in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Adjust admixture quantities as required to maintain quality control.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Design and fabricate precast concrete units to comply with manufacturing and testing procedures, quality control recommendations, and dimensional tolerances of PCI MNL-117, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fabricate units straight, smooth, and true to size and shape, with exposed edges and corners precise and square unless otherwise indicated.

C. All Precast Concrete units shown on plans as radii shall be fabricated to match the radii as shown on plans, faceted embankment wall panels shall not be accepted.

D. Refer to Drawings for additional reinforcing and fabrication requirements. Provide prefabricated reinforcing cages, wire tied or welded as required, inside each unit having total area of steel in each direction not less than 0.0025 times the area of concrete (in section).

Provide two (2) layers of reinforcement per panel. Hang reinforcement from rear, or use other Architect approved method, to prevent reinforcement supports from touching surfaces exposed to view and weather.

E. Built-In Items: Provide reglets, slots, holes, embeds, anchors, window tie-back buttons, and other accessories in units to receive windows, cramps, dowels, reglets, water stops, flashings, light fixtures and other similar work as indicated. Provide all necessary cast in embeds and anchors.

F. Concrete Mixing: Comply with requirements of PCI MNL-117.

1. Measure water used in mixing to an accuracy of 0.5% using a calibrated measuring device. Measure all cement and aggregate materials by weight to an accuracy of 1%.

2. Use admixtures and pigments in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations; use amounts accepted in approved mixed designs to obtain performance criteria indicated.

3. Mix concrete for at least 60 seconds in a mechanical mixer. Place concrete promptly after mixing; discard mixed concrete after 1 hour.

4. Handle and place concrete to avoid segregation, honeycombs, and migration of air. Vibrate to ramp concrete to consolidate, but not to move concrete within forms.

G. Curing: After removal from forms, cure precast panels in strict compliance with PCI MNL117. So not permit curing units to become damaged by loss of moisture or staining and dripping. After precast units have cured enough to prevent uncontrolled erosion during finishing process, lightly sand blast all surfaces indicated to receive “smooth” finish. Do not over blast to such and extent that large aggregates become more exposed than in approved sample. Control blasting to prevent arrises and reveals from losing sharpness and definition.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1145
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 7
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

1. Size of finished units shall be within tolerances prescribed in PCI MNL-117.

H. Repairs: Surface defects may be repaired when acceptable to the Architect and when indistinguishable in finish, color, texture and quality from acceptable unrepaired surfaces.

Demonstrate repair techniques, including curing; obtain Architect’s approval of repair results before continuing work. Replace units that cannot be repaired as specified.

1. It is intended that any required repairs be made in the fabrication plant prior to delivery of units to jobsite. Surface damage occurring after units have left the plant may be repaired in the field only with Architect’s approval; units that the Architect deems irreparable in the field may be rejected.

2. Determine repair mix formulas by trial to obtain finish, color, and texture match when both repaired and acceptable unrepaired concrete are cured and dry.

3. Fill holes, if any, using the same source of cement, sand, and pigment used in the parent concrete.

4. Touch up textured surfaces as necessary.

I. Predelivery Cleaning: Clean objectionable stains or sports off units as directed by the Architect using brushes, soap and clean, running water before delivery to site. Acid cleaning is not acceptable unless approved by Architect.

J. Identification: Mark each unit on a surface concealed from view in final installation with a non-staining, non-migrating paint. Coordinate marking with approved erection drawings.

2.7 APPEARANCE AND FINISH
A. Custom Bench precast concrete seat walls:

1. Color, Aggregate, and Finish: Match Landscape Forms Escofet Twig – white with acidetched finish.

2. Provide finish and uniform color as acceptable to the Architect per approved samples.

PART 1 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Connect architectural precast concrete units in position by bolting, grouting, or as otherwise indicated on Shop Drawings. Remove temporary shims, wedges, and spacers as soon as practical after connecting and grouting are completed.

B. At bolted connections, use lock washers, tack welding, or other approved means to prevent loosening of nuts after final adjustment.

C. Grouting Connections: Grout connections where required or indicated. Retain grout in place until hard enough to support itself. Pack spaces with stiff grout material, tamping until voids are completely filled. Place grout to finish smooth, level, and plumb with adjacent concrete surfaces. Keep grouted joints damp for not less than 24 hours after initial

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1146
WRT 75% Submittal / Building Permit 034801 - 8
Site Precast Concrete
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
set. Promptly remove grout material from exposed surfaces before it affects finishes or hardens.

D. Erect architectural precast concrete units level, plumb, square, true, and in alignment without exceeding the noncumulative erection tolerances of PCI MNL 117, Appendix I.

3.2 REPAIRS
A. Repair damaged architectural precast concrete units if permitted by Architect. The Architect reserves the right to reject repaired units that do not comply with requirements.

B. Mix patching materials and repair units so cured patches blend with color, texture, and uniformity of adjacent exposed surfaces and show no apparent line of demarcation between original and repaired work, when viewed in typical daylight illumination from a distance of 20 feet .

C. Remove and replace damaged architectural precast concrete units when repairs do not comply with requirements.

3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean surfaces of precast concrete units exposed to view.

B. Clean mortar and other deleterious material from concrete surfaces and adjacent materials immediately.

C. Clean exposed surfaces of precast concrete units after erection and completion of joint treatment to remove weld marks, other markings, dirt, and stains.

1. Perform cleaning procedures, if necessary, according to precast concrete fabricator's recommendations. Clean soiled precast concrete surfaces with detergent and water, using stiff fiber brushes and sponges, and rinse with clean water. Protect other work from staining or damage due to cleaning operations.

2. Do not use cleaning materials or processes that could change the appearance of exposed concrete finishes or damage adjacent materials.

3.4 ANTI-GRAFITTI COATING
A. Install per manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION 034801

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1147
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE MASIONRY UNIT 04 22 00-1
SECTION 04 22 00 - CONCRETE MASONRY UNIT
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, the Agreement, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications, and the Drawings.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. The work under this section includes all materials, labor, accessories, equipment and related services to finish Concrete Masonry Unit construction, as shown on Drawings, as specified herein, and all required accompanying accessories.

B. Work included in this section includes the requirements for furnishing and installing Concrete Masonry Unit blocks including but not limited to the following items:

1. Restroom Building shear and bearing walls.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Drilled Dowels and Epoxy Anchors: Section 03 15 00.

B. Expansion Anchors, Screws and Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Section 05 05 19.

C. Latex Base Masonry Waterproofer: Section 07 14 16.

D. Joint Sealants: Section 07 92 00. For elastomeric joint sealants in contraction and other joints in cast-in-place architectural concrete.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Certification: Prior to delivery of concrete masonry materials to the job site, deliver to the Architect a letter from the manufacturer of the proposed masonry units certifying that all such units to be delivered to the job site are in strict conformance with the provisions of this Section.

C. Submittals: Submit mix proportions for Mortar design and Grout Design to Engineer for Review.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate in shop drawings for reinforcing steel bending diagrams, assembly diagrams, splicing, and laps of rods, shapes, dimensions and details of bar reinforcing and accessories.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1148
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE MASIONRY UNIT 04 22 00-2

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide quality assurance (testing and inspection) specifications per CBC Sections 1705.4 and 2105.

B. Preconstruction Testing.

1. Owner will select a qualified independent testing agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner.

2. Determine the compressive strength of masonry by the strength of the unit and type of mortar specified (Unit Strength Method) per CBC Section 2105.6 in accordance with TMS 602 Section 1.4 B.2., Table 2.
a. Concrete Masonry Units: Test per ASTM C140.
b. Grout: Test per ASTM C1019.

3. Determine the compressive strength of masonry by the prism test method in accordance with ASTM C1314. Schedule masonry procurement sufficiently in advance to allow for prism construction and curing.
a. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, construct and test three prisms per ASTM C1314.

1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protection: Protect concrete unit masonry before, during and after installation, and protect installed work of other trades.

1. Avoid scattering concrete materials on the site.

2. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use.

B. Storage: Store masonry units above ground on level platforms allowing air circulation under stacked units.

C. Replacements: In event of damage, make repairs and replacements to satisfaction of the Engineer without additional cost to Owner.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Avoid placing masonry units when air temperature is below 40o F.

B. Protect masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when erected in ambient air temperature of 99o F in the shade, with relative humidity less than 50%.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1149
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE MASIONRY UNIT 04 22 00-3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE BLOCKS
A. Blocks shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 90, precision block. Color and aggregate shall be standard as approved by Architect, and strengths (f’CMU= 2,000 psi, MIN) as specified in ASTM C 90. Blocks shall be standard strength medium weight 8x8x16 with running bond coursing.

B. Caps shall be Basalite standard solid beveled cap 8x4x16 or standard strength medium weight 8x4x16 half-block running bond coursing. Color shall be standard grey Basalite #225 as approved by the Architect.

C. Limit moisture absorption during delivery and until time of installation to the maximum percentage specified for Type I units.

2.2 MORTAR
A. All mortar for concrete block shall be Type "M" and shall conform to ASTM C 270 and shall have minimum compressive strength of 2,500 psi. Color shall be standard grey Basalite #225) as approved by as approved by Architect.

B. Mortar shall be freshly prepared and uniformly mixed and be of spreadable, workable consistency.

C. Mortar should be retempered with water as required to maintain high plasticity. Retempering on mortar boards shall be done only by adding water within a basin formed with the mortar and the mortar worked into the water. Any mortar which is unused after one and one-half hours from the initial mixing time shall not be used.

D. After all ingredients are in the batch mixer they shall be mechanically mixed for not less than three minutes.

E. The use of fire clay, rock dust, dirt and other deleterious materials is prohibited in mortar.

F. Sand and aggregates for mortar shall conform to ASTM C 144.

2.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcement: New, deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A 615. Grade as shown on the drawings.

B. Deliver bars new and free from rust and mill scale in original bundles with mill tags intact.

C. Ties and Anchors: Comply with requirements for type, metal and size of referenced unit masonry standards.

2.4 GROUT
A. Grout shall conform to ASTM C 476 and shall have minimum compressive strength of f’g = 2,000 psi (17.2 MPa) or higher as indicated on Drawings.

B. Coarse grout shall be proportioned by volume, shall consist of one part Portland cement, three (3) parts sand and one to 2 parts coarse aggregate.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1150
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE MASIONRY UNIT 04 22 00-4
C. Laboratory design mixes are acceptable in lieu of the above proportions and are required if the minimum strength is more than 2,500 psi. Grout shall be of fluid consistency with proper proportions of sand to gravel for pouring or pumping.

D. Aggregate for masonry grout shall conform to ASTM C 404.

E. Maximum slump shall be 8" with a low absorption masonry and 10" with a high absorption unit.

2.5 OTHER MATERIALS
A. All other materials not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation of the work of this Section, shall be as selected by the Contractor subject to approval by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

1. Masonry shall not be started when the horizontal and vertical alignment of the foundation is out of plumb or line one inch or more.

B. Commencement of installation of any products of this Section shall be considered as acceptance of the substrate and conditions as being satisfactory for proper installation of products of this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate as required with other work to assure proper and adequate provision in other work for interface with the work of this Section.

B. Install the work of this Section in strict accordance with the original design, the approved Shop Drawings, pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction, and the manufacturer's recommended installation procedures.

C. Provide bond indicated in drawings.

D. Avoid using chipped or broken units. If such units are discovered in the finished wall, Architect may require their immediate removal and replacement with new units without additional cost to the Owner.

E. Care shall be taken to prevent grout and mortar stains. Keep wall continually clean; if grout does run over, clean immediately.

F. All masonry shall be laid true, level and plumb in accordance with the Drawings.

G. The masonry units shall be cut accurately to fit all plumbing, ducts, openings, electrical work, etc., and all holes are to be neatly patched.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1151
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE MASIONRY UNIT 04 22 00-5
H. No construction support shall be attached to the wall except where specifically permitted by the Architect.

I. The top surface of the concrete foundation shall be clean and free of laitance and the aggregate exposed before starting masonry construction.

J. Wall shall be laid up in straight, uniform courses with regular running bond courses.

K. All work, bond patterns or special details as shown on the Drawings shall be accurately and uniformly executed.

L. Joints:

1. The starting joint on foundations shall be laid with full mortar coverage on the bed joints except that the area where the grout occurs shall be free from mortar so that the grout will be in contact with the foundation.

2. Mortar joints shall be straight, clean, and uniform in thickness and shall be tooled as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise specified or details on the plans, in hollow unit masonry the horizontal and vertical mortar joints shall be 3/8" thick.

3. Visible joints shall be tooled with a concave surface. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by fluid-applied membrane waterproofing or other materials, unless otherwise indicated. Tooling shall be done when the mortar is partially set and still sufficiently plastic to bond. All tooling shall be done with a tool that compacts the mortar.

4. Vertical head joints shall be butted for a thickness equal to the face shell of the unit and these joints shall be shoved tightly so that the mortar bonds well with both units.

5. If it is necessary to remove a unit after it has been set in place, the unit shall be removed from the wall, cleaned and set in fresh mortar.

6. All work, bonds or special details shall be accurately and uniformly executed. Face joints shall be tooled as shown on the Plans and in the Specifications.

7. Where control joints are required or specified, they shall be as detailed on the Drawings.

M. Reinforcing:

1. When a foundation dowel is incorrectly placed in a cell without a vertical bar as detailed, a typical vertical bar shall be added at the cell with the dowel in addition to placing a vertical bar in the cell where the dowel was meant to be. If the dowel is in the correct cell but does not align with the vert bar, the dowel shall be sloped at 1 horizontal : 6 vertical to align with the vert bar to form a contact lap splice.

2. Reinforcing bars shall be straight except for bends around corners and where bends or hooks are detailed on the structural drawings.

3. Reinforcing steel where spliced shall be lapped a minimum of 40 bar diameters, unless otherwise indicated in drawings.

4. When full length vertical bars are used, they shall be held in position at top and bottom at intervals not exceeding 200 bar diameters of the reinforcement.

5. Horizontal reinforcing shall be laid on the webs of bond beam units and shall be solidly grouted in place. Reinforcing in channel units shall be spaced off the bottom of the unit.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1152
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set CONCRETE MASIONRY UNIT 04 22 00-6

6. Vertical reinforcing shall have a minimum clearance of 1/2" from the masonry shell.

N. Grouting:

1. Reinforcement shall be in place before grouting starts.

2. Mortar droppings shall be kept out of a grout space.

3. All grout shall be mechanically vibrated in place.

4. Vertical cells to be filled shall have vertical alignment to maintain a continuous unobstructed cell area not less than two inches by three inches.

5. All cells shall be solidly filled with grout and pours shall be stopped 1-1/2 inch below the top of a course to form a key or joints.

6. Grouting at beams over openings shall be done in one continuous operation.

7. Spaces around metal door frames and other built-in items shall be filled solidly with grout or mortar.

8. Columns, beams, joists, and similar structural members shall be anchored to the wall with anchor bolts or their equivalent. Anchors shall be fully, solidly embedded in place. Embedment shall not be less than shown on the drawings.

9. Low Lift Grouting: Structure shall be grouted in lifts per code. Grout shall be mechanically vibrated to insure full penetration into mortar joints and around steel.

END OF SECTION 04 22 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1153
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANSION ANCHORS 05 05 19 - 1
SECTION 05 05 19 - EXPANSION ANCHORS, SCREW ANCHORS & POWDER-ACTUATED

FASTENERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide all material, labor, equipment and services necessary for the installation of all expansion, screw anchors and/or powder-actuated pins. The work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Drill holes in existing and or new concrete elements for new expansion and screw anchors.

2. Install expansion and screw anchors in drilled holes.

3. Tighten the expansion anchors to the required torque.

B. Work included in this section includes dowels and anchors required for concrete and as shown on the Drawings.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Concrete Reinforcing: 03 20 00.

B. Cast-in-Place Concrete : 03 30 00
C. Cast-In-Place Concrete: 03 30 00
D. Concrete Masonry Unit : 04 22 00

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following applicable standards unless otherwise specified herein:

1. CBC - California Building Code, latest edition.

2. ICC-ES- "Evaluation Report" of ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.

3. ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials.

4. ASTM E488-18 - Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements.

5. A.C. 193 – ICC-ES Acceptance Criteria for the testing of Cracked Concrete Expansion and Screw anchors in compliance with ACI 318 Chapter 17.

B. Tests and Inspections: Test and inspections shall be done by the Testing Agency.

1. Sampling and Testing

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1154
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANSION ANCHORS 05 05 19 - 2
a. Anchors shall be sampled and identified in accordance with manufacturer’s suggested identification method.

2. Inspection
a. Special inspection as required by CBC Chapter 17, Section 1705.3 & Table 1705.3. 1) Drilling and placing of anchors in the drilled holes shall be inspected periodically by a qualified inspector from the Testing Agency.

3. Testing
a. Test each size and type of anchors to tension loads specified in schedules on the Drawings:
1) Test Load 10 percent of the total number of anchors installed each day:
2) Testing shall be in accordance with ASTM E488, “Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements."
3) Tension Test Loads: Refer to schedules on Drawings or this section for test loads. 4) Test loads shall be held a minimum of 2 minutes each with a maximum slip of 1/8 inch
5) If any one anchor installed in any one day fails the tension and slip test, all anchors installed that day shall be tested.
6) Do not apply test loads until at least two days after anchors are set and torqued.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for Engineer’s review. Indicate placing diagrams for the anchors.

1. Review of drawings will cover only the general scheme and character of the anchor layout, but not the checking of dimensions, nor will such review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Drawings.

B. Manufacturer's Catalog Data

1. Expansion Anchors, Screw Anchors and Components.

C. ICC-ES Evaluation Reports:

1. Submit Current ICC-ES report showing Cracked Concrete Compliance for Expansion

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1155
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANSION ANCHORS 05 05 19 - 3
Anchors and Screw Anchors.

D. Test and Inspection Reports from qualified inspector

1. Anchor placement inspection report including all items referenced by ICC-ES report.

2. Anchor pull testing values.

1.6 STORAGE
A. Provide job site storage in weatherproof and dry enclosure. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil and dirt.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Expansion Anchors

1. Expansion anchors shall be steel "Wedge Anchors," stud type with wedge clips, tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC 193 and shall have ‘Cracked Concrete’ compliance.

2. The following "Wedge Anchors" have the minimum ICC-ES/CBC requirements for shear and tension values for use in lightweight aggregate concrete and/or stone aggregate concrete at the tabulated values for anchor diameter, minimum embedment, and concrete strength:

1. Simpson Strong-Tie: ‘Strong-Bolt 2’ (ICC-ESR Report 3037 for concrete, ER240 for masonry), A316 Stainless Steel finish, w/ exposed bolt painted to match adjacent steel finish.

2. Hilti Fastening Systems: ‘Hilti "Kwik Bolt-TZ’ ( ICC-ESR Report 1917), A316 Stainless Steel finish, w/ exposed bolt painted to match adjacent steel finish.

3. Carbon steel anchors shall consist of the following, or equivalent, materials:
a. Studs - ASTM Al 08, AISI Grade Designation 1010.
b. Wedge Clips - ASTM Al 08, AISI Grade Designation 1010. c. Nuts - ASTM A563, Grade A
d. Washers - ASTM Al 08, AISI Grade Designation 1010.
e. Hot-Dip Galvanized Coating with w/ exposed bolt painted to match adjacent steel finish

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1156
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANSION ANCHORS 05 05 19 - 4
on all items - ASTM A153 or ASTM B695, U.O.N.

B. Concrete & Grouted Concrete Masonry Units Screws

1. Simpson Strong-Tie:
a. ‘Titen HD’ for indoor use (ICC-ESR Report 2713 for concrete and ICC-ESR Report 1056 for masonry)
b. ‘Stainless Steel Titen HD’ or galvanized for exterior use (IAPMO UES ER493 for concrete & ICC-ESR Report 1056 for masonry)

2. Hilti Fastening Systems:
a. ‘KH-EZ’ for indoor use (ICC-ES Report 3027 for concrete and ICC- ESR Report 3056 for masonry)
b. ‘KH-EZ SS316’ for exterior use (ICC-ES Report 3027 for concrete and ICCESR Report 3056 for masonry) C. Hollow Concrete Masonry Units Screws
a. ‘Titen HD’ , galvanized and stainless (ICC-ESR Report 1056) D. Powder Actuated Fasteners

1. Simpson Strong-Tie: ‘PDP’ pins (ICC-ESR Report 2138) for wood and cold formed framing.

2. Hilti Fastening Systems: ‘X-CP 72 P8’ pins for wood (ICC ESR-2379) and ‘X-U P8’ for cold formed ((ICC ESR-2269)
PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect areas to be drilled to verify conditions of access, interferences and existing materials.

1. Drilling operations may be limited to particular times of the normal work day.

2. Verify location of all existing mild steel reinforcement in new and/or existing concrete prior to drilling. Use care and caution to avoid cutting or damaging existing reinforcing bars.

Pacometer tests, radiograph tests, or other appropriate tests shall be required to locate steel. Maintain a minimum clearance of 1 inch between existing reinforcement and anchors.

3. Where drilling causes concrete to spall or crack, remove unsound materials and replace as directed by the Engineer.

4. Proceed with drilling following removal or replacement of unsound or damaged concrete.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1157
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set EXPANSION ANCHORS 05 05 19 - 5

3.2 ANCHOR HOLES
A. Holes for anchors shall be drilled in new and/or existing concrete using a rotary hammer drill with a carbide-tipped bit. Holes shall be same diameter as bolt diameters and holes shall be drilled to the depths indicated on the plans.

B. Anchor size and embedment shall be as indicated in Schedules and Details on the Drawings or this Section. In no case shall embedment of anchor be less than that shown in the valid ICC-ES Evaluation Report for that particular anchor.

C. Dust and other contaminants shall be completely removed from holes by blowing with oil-free compressed air as specified by the manufacturer.

3.3 ANCHOR EMBEDMENT AND TEST LOAD SCHEDULE
A. Anchors shall be installed with the minimum embedments as indicated in Schedules and Details on the Drawings and be tested to the values noted on the Drawings.

3.4 ANCHOR PLACEMENT
A. Anchors shall be placed and driven in holes to a depth that will provide the minimum embedment.

3.5 ANCHOR TIGHTENING
A. Anchors shall be tightened to the minimum torque values specified in schedules on the Drawings or this Section using torque wrenches or other approved methods for tightening the anchors.

B. Installation of anchors shall be in strict accordance with manufacturers written recommendations and as directed by the manufacturer's service representative.

C. Anchors shall set for a minimum of 2 days before any load test can be performed on the anchors.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect anchors from displacement or disturbance after installation.

B. Protect existing exposed surfaces and surrounding area during drilling operations. Clean and/or repair marred or damaged surfaces as directed by the Architect.

3.7 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove from the site all debris resulting from the work of this Section.

END OF SECTION 05 05 19

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1158
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 1
SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Provide all materials, labor, equipment and services necessary for the fabrication, erection and completion of all structural steel, including all bracing and shoring required for erection and related work. The work shall include and not necessarily be limited to the following:

1. Restroom / Facilities Building

2. Facilities Building Canopy

3. Custom Steel Light Poles

4. Miscellaneous site elements

5. Verification of anchor bolt setting and of levels to assure adequate fit of the steel work.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.

B. Expansion Anchors, Screws and Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Section 05 05 19.

C. Rough Carpentry: Section 06 10 00.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standards: Comply with the following applicable standards unless otherwise specified herein:

1. CBC—“California Building Code,” 2022 Edition and all applicable local Building Codes.

2. AISC-- American Institute of Steel Construction’s “Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings, AISC 360” latest edition.

3. AISC—American Institute of Steel Construction’s “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, AISC 303” latest edition.

4. AISC—American Institute of Steel Construction’s “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, AISC 341” latest edition.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1159
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 2

5. AWS—American Welding Society’s “Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1” latest Edition.

6. AWS—American Welding Society’s “Structural Welding Code-Seismic Supplement, AWS D1.8” latest Edition.

7. “AISC—American Institute of Steel Construction’s “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts,” latest edition.

8. ASTM—American Society for Testing and Materials.

9. SSPC—Steel Structures Painting Council.

10. ICBO—“Evaluation Report” of ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Contractor shall certify, test and inspect all materials, welding, fabrication and erection in accordance with the requirements of AISC and AWS D1.1 and as noted herein. The Owner will employ a Testing Agency to provide for additional testing and inspections only as noted in the sections below.

2. Mill analysis and test reports for the steel, certified and properly executed by the manufacturer, will constitute sufficient evidence of conformity with the specifications.

Contractor shall identify steel in accordance with CBC Section 2202 as to heat number and furnish the Testing Agency. If the material cannot be identified or its source is questionable, one set of tension and bend tests shall be made by the Testing Agency in accordance with the CBC Section 2202. a. The cost of all tests including sampling and machining of test coupons shall be paid by the Contractor.
b. The Contractor shall cooperate with Testing Agency and provide all material required to take coupons for testing, as required by the Engineer.

3. Certificates of compliance for welding electrodes and shear studs properly executed by the manufacturer(s) shall constitute sufficient evidence of compliance with the specification.

4. High strength bolts, nuts, washers and thread rods shall be sampled and tested in accordance with the requirements of the specification for High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints, ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 Bolts.

5. Additional testing required as a result of corrective measures to correct defects shall be paid for by the Contractor.

C. Welding Inspection by the Contractor: All shop and field welding shall be inspected by the contractor’s “Welding Inspector” as defined by AWS D1.1, Section 6.1. Governing Building Code regulations shall not be construed as to alleviate either the Contractor’s welding inspector of the Testing Agency from the welding inspection requirements of AWS D1,1. The Contractor’s Quality Control Inspector shall be present during all shop and field welding operations, shall inspect the work as required by AWS D1.1, Section 6, shall possess and be familiar with all approved WPSs and shall cooperate with the Testing Agency.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1160
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 3
D. Welding Inspection by the Testing Agency: All shop and field welding shall be inspected by a qualified and certified “Verification Inspector” as defined by AWS D1.1 Section 6.1, employed by the Testing Agency in accordance with AWS D1.1 Section 6 and in accordance with the Special Inspection Requirements of the governing Building Code. This inspector shall confirm the qualification of welders, the use of AWS qualified procedures, the manufacturer’s recommended use of automatic equipment and the proper use of preheat. Inspection personnel shall be qualified for non-destructive testing at Level II as specified in Section 6, Paragraph 6.7 of AWS D1.1. The Testing Agency shall submit welding inspector qualifications to the engineer for approval. The Testing Agency shall submit a welding inspection checklist to the engineer for approval.

1. Welder Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified for the work in accordance with AWS D1.1, Section 5, Part C. Except as noted herein, the welders’ qualification shall be considered as remaining in effect indefinitely unless there is a specific reason for questioning the welder’s ability, in which case welder re-certification may be required.

If in the opinion of the Engineer, the welder is not suitable for the project, said welder may be disqualified from the project. Field Welders shall be qualified in all processes to be used on-site, in all positions, and on all thickness.

2. Equipment Electrical Meter Calibration Verification: The Contractor shall verify, to the satisfaction of the Testing Agency, that electrical meters are being used, and those in use accurately reflect voltage and amperage at the welding site for the length of cable in use.

3. Visual Inspection: Visually inspect all shop and field welding, including the superstructure, stairs, guardrails, and supports and/or bracing of finishes and nonstructural components. Visual inspection shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1., Sections 5 and 6, and shall include verification of fit up, preheat, calibration of equipment, equipment settings, materials, adherence to approved WPS, interpass temperatures, deposition rates, technique, proper fusion of each pass, ensure the weld is crack free at each pass, confirm porosity and undercut do not exceed AWS requirements and confirm the final weld profile, and confirm that all special requirements specified herein are adhered to. Visual inspectors shall examine each step of the welding process.

4. Welded Studs: Testing and inspection of steel studs welded to structural steel shall be in accordance with Section 7, Stud Welding, AWS D1.1.

5. Where welds have been indicated on the drawings as being part of the Seismic Force-Resisting System (SFRS) or Demand Critical, in addition to the requirements above, inspection shall be in accordance with AWS D1.8. Section 7 E. Fabrication Inspection: All fabrication of structural steel shall be inspected by the Testing Agency. This inspection, in addition to the welding inspection requirements specified herein, shall consist of, but shall not necessarily be limited to, the following:

1. Visually inspect steel shapes and plates for existence of defects such as laminations and non-metallic inclusions. Use ultrasonic equipment and other NDT methods to determine extent of defects.

2. Verify steel materials with mill certificates, particularly where yield strength limits, grain size and/or toughness properties are specified in Section 2.1. Verify weld filler metal materials with certificates and manufacturers recommended limitations.

3. Review sections used for conformity to dimensional standards specified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1161
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 4
F. Erection Inspection: All erection of structural steel shall be inspected by the Contractor and the Testing Agency. Provisions under “Fabrication Inspection” and “Welding Inspection" shall apply.

1. All welding shall be inspected by the Testing Agency. Complete and partial penetration welds shall be ultrasonically tested per the provisions under “Welding Inspection.”

2. High strength bolting shall be inspected by the Testing Agency in conformance with the “Specification for Structural Joints using High-Strength Bolts” as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.19).

B. Mill Test Reports: Contractor shall furnish certified copies of all mill analysis and test reports covering the chemical and physical properties of the steel for review by the Testing Agency and the engineer.

C. Certificates of compliance: Contractor shall submit certificates of compliance for bolts, welding electrodes, and shear studs.

D. Shop Drawings:

1. Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing anchor bolt layout, details of members, their connections, details of weld grove profiles, indication of size and spacing of bolts, and erection plans for the execution of the work showing the marking, and position of each member. Detail drawings shall indicate the position of each member on the framing plans. Shop drawings of details incorporating SR welds shall include explicit references to corresponding approved weld procedure specifications.

2. Checking by Contractor: Prior to submission of the shop drawings to the Architect/Engineer, they shall be pre-checked by the Contractor for conformity of detail with the Contract Documents and as coordinated with other subcontractors.

The signature of a representative of the Contractor indicating that the drawings have been pre-checked will be required. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the conformity of dimensions and details of the shop drawings with the Contract Documents.

3. Review by Architect/Engineer: Provide PDF Digital copies of any shop drawing submittal. After receipt of the shop drawings by the Architect/Engineer, they will be reviewed and necessary corrections will be marked on one copy, which will be returned. One copy shall be retained by the both the Architect and the Engineer.

Corrections shall then be made and the drawings resubmitted. This procedure will be continued until the drawings are approved or approved as noted and released for construction. Once approved, if variations between the shop drawings and the original construction drawings (plans & details) exist, the shop drawings shall take precedence.

4. Submissions: Per General Provisions.

5. Additional copies of the approved shop drawings shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1162
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 5

6. File: At least one copy of each approved shop drawing shall be kept available in the Contractor’s field office. Drawings not bearing evidence of approval and release for construction by the Engineer shall not be kept on the job site.

E. Bolts: Submit manufacturer’s data for high strength bolts and direct tension indicator washers.

F. Review of submittals and shop drawings will cover only the general scheme and character of the details, but not the checking of dimensions, nor will such review relieve the Contractor from responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the contract drawings.

G. Paint Samples:

1. Contractor shall provide six (6) color paint samples nominally 8” x 10” for approval by Owner and Architect prior to beginning coating process:
a. Color: Tnemec 3GR Gray, or as selected by Architect
PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL MATERIALS
A. Structural Steel shapes and Plates: ASTM A572 Grade 50, typical unless noted otherwise.

B. Rolled steel W and WT sections: ASTM A992, Grade 50.

C. Channel and angle sections may be ASTM A36.

D. Rectangular HSS Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B—Cold Formed Structural Tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B.

F. Round HSS Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B, Fy = 46 ksi, Fu = 62 ksi.

G. Stainless Steel: Plate sheet and Coil: ASTM A240/A240M Type 316.

2.2 FASTENER PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. Anchor Bolts for Columns: ASTM F1554 Grade 36 or 55. HDG per ASTM F2329.

B. Machine Bolts: ASTM A307 Grade A. If HDG then per ASTM A-153.

C. High-Strength Bolts, Heavy Hex Head: ASTM F3125 Grade A325, Connection Type X, N or SC, as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Heavy Hex Nuts: ASTM A563 Grade A. If HDG then galvanized per ASTM A-153.

E. Stainless Steel

1. Stainless Steel Bolts: ASTM A193 B8M Type 316.

2. Stainless Steel Nuts: ASTM A194 B8M Type 316.

3. Round Bars, Bars: ASTM A-479, Type 316

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1163
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 6

4. Plate: ASTM A-240, grade 316
F. Direct Tension Indicators: ASTM F959-94A for use with SC bolts.

G. Mild welded steel studs. ASTM A29. Shear studs and concrete connectors, Stud Welding AWS D1.1 Type B. Standard mild steel studs, AWS Type A.

H. Stainless Steel welded studs. ASTM A276 or A493, A316, AWS D1.6.

I. Connections to Wood Heavy Timber Framing: ASTM A47 Galvanized Malleable Iron washers.

J. Stainless steel Bolts: ASTM F593

2.3 WELDING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. Arc-welding Electrodes: Filler metals shall conform to Table 4.1 of AWS D1.1. Electrodes and equipment settings shall be as recommended by the filler metal manufacturer for the position, thickness or other conditions of actual use. All electrodes and filler metals shall be low hydrogen types.

1. Electrode wire diameter: FCAW wire diameter shall not exceed the values specified in AWS D1.1., Section 4.14.1.

B. Arc-welding equipment: Equipment for electric welding shall have calibrated meters for voltage and amperage that accurately indicate voltage and amperage quantities at the welding site for the length of the cable to be used. Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Testing Agency the accuracy of the meters, using external meters attached to extension cables of a length that reflects actual project conditions. If equipment meters do not accurately reflect electrical properties at the welding site, external meters shall be used at the welding site and shall be provided but the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.

2.4 COATING PRODUCTS AND MATERIALS
A. All steel framing shall be painted according to the following specifications:

1. Shop or Field Primer: Tnemec Series 94-H2O, Hydro-Zinc, 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. VOC content shall not exceed 400 g/L.

2. Stripe-Coat Procedure: Tnemec Series 1095 Endura-Shield; brush-applied to all welds, voids, nuts, bolts and sharp edges and areas inaccessible to roller application referencing SSPC-PA 1, 6.6 Striping.

3. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series 1095 Endura-Shield at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT.

4. Final Coat: Tnemec Series 1071V Fluoronar semi-gloss (Color to be approved by Owner & Architect see below); 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT.

5. Contractor shall provide six (6) color paint samples nominally 8” x 10” for approval by Owner and Landscape Architect prior to beginning coating process:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1164
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 7
b. Color: Custom color to match Lumec Light Pole GY3TX, RAL 7037, or as selected by Landscape Architect
Shop Galvanizing: All items noted on the drawings or specifications as galvanized shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Thickness of galvanized coating shall be in conformance with ASTM A123.

B. Hardware Galvanizing: All hardware products such as castings, fasteners, rolled, pressed, and forged products, and miscellaneous threaded objects noted on the drawings or specifications as galvanized shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153.

Anchor Bolts for Columns specified as ASTM F1554 Grade 36 or 55 noted on the drawings or specifications as galvanized shall be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM F2329.

C. Galvanizing repair compound shall be ZRC Galvalite Cold Galvanizing Compound or approved equivalent.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Workmanship and details of structural steel work, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to Uniform Building Code and the AISC Specification for Design, Fabrications and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. The quality of materials and the fabrication of all welded connections shall conform to the American Welding Society’s Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1.

B. The Contractor shall secure all field measurements necessary for the completion of this work.

The contractor shall be responsible for all errors of detailing and fabrication and for the correct fitting of the structural members to each other and to their supports. Provide column anchor bolts and templates for setting under Section 77, Structural Cast-in-Place Concrete; and this Section to verify location.

C. All materials both before and after fabrication shall be protected from rust corrosion and shall be kept free from dirt, grease and other foreign matter.

D. Each framing member shall be free from twists and bends. Holes and all cut and sheared edges shall be neatly made without kinks, butts, and warped edges. All steel left exposed shall be straight, smooth and free of nicks, scars and dents. Exposed welds shall be uniform and neat.

E. Installation of steel studs, headed for shear connectors and threaded for parts connectors, welded to structural steel, shall be in accordance with Section 7, Stud Welding, of AWS D1.1.

F. Holes for Bolts: Holes for bolts shall be 1/16 inch larger than the nominal diameter of the bolt. If the thickness of the material is not greater than the nominal diameter for the bolt plus 1/8 inch, the holes may be punched. Holes in thicker material shall be drilled from the solid or sub-punched and reamed. Holes for high-strength bolts shall have all burrs removed by grinding.

G. Column Bearing Surfaces: Column bases, as required by the AISC specification, and all column bearing surfaces shall be milled to a true plane perpendicular to the axis of the member to assure a complete bearing at the contact face.

H. Camber: All beams and girders shall be cambered if and as indicated on the Drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1165
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 8
I. Dimensional Tolerances: Fabrication and erection tolerances shall conform to AISC requirements except where closer tolerances are shown on the Drawings.

3.2 WELDING
A. Welded Connections: Where structural joints are made by welding, the details of all joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used in correcting defective work shall conform to requirements of “Specification for Structural Steel for Buildings, AISC 360” and “Structural Welding Code, AWS D1.1”

1. Where welds have been indicated on the drawings as being part of the Seismic Force-Resisting System (SFRS) or Demand Critical, in additional to the requirements above, the details of all joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made, and the methods used in correcting defective work shall conform to requirements of “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings, AISC 341” and “Structural Welding Code-Seismic Supplement, AWS D1.8” B. Qualification of Welders: Welding operators shall qualified by tests, as prescribed in the “Standard Qualification Procedure of the American Welding Society” (as specified in AWS D1.1) to perform the type of work required, including process, position and thickness. All welders shall be capable of reading and following the approved written WPS.

1. Where welds have been indicated on the drawings as being part of the Seismic Force-Resisting System (SFRS) or Demand Critical, in addition to the requirements above, welding operators must also be certified in accordance with AWS D1.8.

Section 5.

C. General Requirements: All welding shall conform to the following:

1. Equipment: Use equipment which will supply proper current, voltage, etc., as recommended by the manufacturer of electrodes to be used, adjusted to suit arrangement and thickness of base metal. Suitable meters and means of adjustment shall be provided for current and voltage

2. Preparation for Welding: All surfaces shall be clean, free of rust, paint and foreign matter of any kind. Scale shall be removed by wire brush, chipping or hammering as required. Thermal cut edges to be welded shall be chipped clean, and ground at least 1/32 inch to bright metal before welding. Clamp members as required, space and alternate welds all as may be necessary to prevent warping or misalignment.

3. Fitup: Weld joint profiles shall meet dimensional requirements and maximum tolerances specified by AWS D1.1 or as specified in approved Qualification Procedures. Joint fitup that does not comply shall be corrected using approved procedures and approved by the inspector before welding proceeds.

4. Preheat/ Interpass/ Postheat: Provide minimum preheat and interpass temperatures and Post-heat/Cool Down procedures as required by AWS D1.1, unless otherwise specified herein. Deposition rates shall be controlled to be within minimum and maximum interpass temperatures.

5. Weld Quality: Welds shall present a uniform surface, free of imperfections as defined by AWS, and without undercutting or over-lapping and free of excessive oxides, gas pockets and non-metallic inclusions. Welds shall be made with the proper number of beads or passes to secure sound, thoroughly fused joints. Each deposit shall not exceed 5/16 inch of weld for each pass, nor shall each deposit exceed maximum

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1166
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 9
layer height and bead width specified in AWS D1.1. Each pass shall be cleaned by chipping and wire brushing to remove scale and slag, before placing any additional weld metal.

6. Sequence of Welding: For highly restrained connection and/or weldments, the sequence of welding shall be designed to minimize distortion of the members and to minimize the buildup of internal stresses.

7. Filler Metal: Filler metal shall conform to Table 4.1 of AWS D1.1. Weld metal shall be thoroughly fused with the base metal along all surfaces and edges of the union.

Penetration shall be 1/16 inch minimum and shall be into the root of the joint.

D. Faculty and Defective Welding: Any welding performed without inspection or contrary to the approved WPS, or showing cracks, slag inclusion, lack of fusion, undercut or other defects as defined by AWS, ascertained by visual or other means for inspection, shall be chipped out and properly replaced by the contractor, and re-inspected by the Testing Agency, all at the Contractor’s expense.

3.3 ERECTION
A. Field Connections: Workmanship of field bolted and welded connections shall conform in all respects to methods and tolerances specified for fabrication. Holes shall be cut, drilled or punched to a diameter 1/16” larger than the bolt holes, UON. Holes shall not be burned or enlarged by flame cutting.

B. All bolted connections shall conform to the AISC and shall use high strength threaded fasteners, UON. High Strength bolted connections shall be made in conformance with the “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325, heavy hexagonal structural diameter, approved by Research Council of Riveted and Bolted Joints of the Engineering Foundation.” C. Tighten nuts using wither “Calibrated Wrench” method, “Twist off Element” method, “Turn-ofNut” method, or by the use of a “Direct Tension Indicator”. Minimum bolt tension as per applicable standard ISC “Specification for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” for each bolt type and size used. Washers may be omitted for ASTM A325 bolts when “Turnof-Nut” method is used.

D. Column anchor bolts shall be furnished under this Section and set under Section 03 30 00, Structural Cast-in-Place Concrete. Provide washers under nuts and heads.

E. Metal templates shall be furnished with bolts for setting of all column anchor bolts. The Contractor shall furnish instructions for the setting of anchor bolts and shall ascertain that the items are properly set during the progress of the work.

F. Column base plates shall be set level to correct elevation, and temporarily supported until the supported members has been plumbed and the column base plate grouted. The entire bearing area under plates shall be grouted solid under Section 03 30 00, Structural Cast-inPlace Concrete with non-shrink grout placed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures for 28-day minimum ultimate compressive strength of 5,000 psi.

3.4 FRAMING AND BRACING
A. All structural steel shall be erected true and plumb. Temporary shoring and bracing shall be used wherever necessary and shall be adequate for all loads to which the structure may be

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1167
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 10
subjected, including wind and erection equipment and operation of same. Leave temporary bracing and shoring in place as long as may be required for safety, and until final framing construction is completed.

B. No final connections shall be made until the structure has been properly aligned. All temporary flooring, planking and scaffolding necessary in connection with the erection of the structural steel, or support of erection machinery shall be provided as part of the erection work. The temporary floors and scaffolding shall conform to the requirements of all laws governing safety regulations.

C. Drifting done during assembly shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Mismatching of holes greater than 3/32 inch shall require reaming for the next larger bolt. Mismatching of holes greater than 1/8 inch shall be cause for rejection.

3.5 SHOP PAINTING
A. General: Shop prime all structural steel work except members or portions of members to be fireproofed or embedded in concrete. Prime embedded steel that is partially exposed on the exposed portions and the initial 2” of embedded areas only. Do not prime contact surfaces that are to be welded or high-strength bolted with friction-type connections or top flanges of beams to which metal decking will be welded.

1. Apply two coats of primer to surfaces that are inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.

B. Surface Preparation: After inspection, clean all steel work to be primed and prime before shipping from the shop. Remove loose rust, mill scale and spatter, slag or flux deposits.

Clean all steel, including steel to be fireproofed or embedded in concrete as follows:

1. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council’s “Painting Manual” for Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP 1), either Hand Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP2) or Power Tool Cleaning SSPC-SP3) and Commercial Blast Cleaning (SSPC-SP6/NACE 3).

C. Also refer to Part 2.4 – Coating Products and Materials

3.6 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. After installation, all field welds and areas in which shop painting has been disturbed shall receive surface preparation as specified for shop painting.

PART 4 – DEFECTIVE WORK

4.1 GENERAL
A. Work found to be defective, missing or damaged shall immediately be replaced with proper work. Such replaced work and the inspection for it shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

B. Straightening of any material, if necessary, shall be done by a process and in a manner that will not injure the materials, and which is approved by the Architect. Sharp kinks or bends shall be cause for rejection. Heating will not be allowed.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1168
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 05 12 00 - 11
C. De-lamination and other rolling defects in structural shapes and plates shall be cause for rejection when, in the judgment of the Architect, repairs are not feasible or acceptable.

D. If defects or damaged work cannot be corrected in the field, the material shall be returned to the shop, new parts furnished, as the Architect requests; the Contractor shall replace all work at their own expense.

E. Beams supporting metal deck that are not in alignment or at the right elevation shall be changed to suit proper support conditions of the metal deck.

F. Welds completed, or in process, that do not conform to the approved Welding Procedure Specification may be considered defective and shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

END OF SECTION 05 12 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1169
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-1
SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install cold-formed steel framing required for the Project as shown on the Drawings and specified herein for the Facilities and Restroom Building.

This section also includes:

1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing.

2. Interior load-bearing wall framing.

3. Roof rafter framing.

4. Ceiling joist framing.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS
A. Cast-in-Place Concrete: Section 03 30 00.

B. Metal Fabrications: Section 05 50 00.

C. Gypsum Sheathing: Section 06 16 43.

D. Building Insulation: Section 07 21 00.

E. Non-Structural Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Section 09 22 16 for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies.

F. Gypsum Board: Section 09 29 00. For interior non-load bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.

1.4 REFERENCES, CODES, AND STANDARDS.

The following references, codes, and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and cold formed steel work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

A. "Cold- Formed Steel Design Manual", AISI S100, latest edition.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1170
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-2
B. “Seismic Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Systems”, AISI S400, latest edition.

C. California Building Code, 2022 Edition.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings prepared by cold-formed metal framing manufacturer.

1. Include layout, spacing, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.

2. Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

3. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis and detailed shop drawings signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer, who shall be licensed in the State in which the Project is located and responsible for their preparation.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency, unless otherwise stated, indicating that each of the following complies with the requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests for current products:

1. Steel sheet.

2. Expansion anchors.

3. Power-actuated anchors.

4. Mechanical fasteners.

D. Research / Evaluation Reports: For cold-formed steel framing.

1. Metal stud manufacturer to have a 3rd party evaluation report for its products that are reviewed to the local building code or its model code (CBC 2019 and AISI S100).

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Member in good standing of the Steel Framing Industry Association (SFIA).

1. Products to be certified under an independent third-party inspection program administered by an agency accredited by IAS to ICC-ES AC98 IAS Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Agencies.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1171
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-3
B. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, design calculations, and other structural data by a qualified professional engineer.

C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this project in material, design, and extent.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

E. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.

F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel".

2. AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel".

G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by, and displaying a classification label from, a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

H. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with:

1. AISI S100 “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

2. AISI S200 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions”.

3. AISI S201 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product Standard”.

4. AISI S211 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Wall Stud Design”.

5. AISI S212 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Header Design”.

6. AISI S213 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Lateral Design”.

7. AISI “Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing”.

8. AISI S400 “North American Standard for Seismic Design of Cold- Formed Steel Structural Systems”.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1172
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-4

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect and store cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required in AISI's "Code of Standard Practice".

1.9 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following coldformed metal framing products manufactured by members of the SFIA, or equal:

1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2. The Steel Network Inc.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 19 Quality Assurance Requirements, to design cold-formed steel framing.

B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Design Loads: As indicated:
a. Dead Loads:
1) Exterior Wall/cladding: 20 psf
2) Roof 20 psf
3) Concentrated Equipment Loads
b. Live Loads:
1) Roof Live Loads: 20 psf.
2) Concentrated loads per CBC
c. Snow Loads: N/A
d. Wind Loads:
1) Base on a 4ft² effective wind area, per ASCE 7 Figure 30.3-2A as follows 2) Zone 1’ (Center Roof Area Field): -16.0psf
3) Zone 1 (Roof Area Field): -19.7psf
4) Zone 2 (Roof Area Perimeter): -26.0psf
(a) Location: From roof edge to 6.5ft inside roof edge. 5) Zone 3 (Roof Area Corners): -35.5psf
(a) Location: 2.5’x6.5’ rectangular area, each direction from building corner. e. Seismic Loads at Strength Level: 0.170 * W
f. Building Code Requirements: 2022 CBC

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1173
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-5

2. Total Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:
a. Exterior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.
b. Interior Load-Bearing Wall Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height under a horizontal load of 5 lbf/sq. ft.
c. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height.
d. Floor Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/480 for live loads and 1/360 for total loads of the span.
e. Roof Rafter Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the horizontally projected span.
f. Ceiling Joist Framing: Vertical deflection of 1/360 of the span. g. Panel members supporting window glazing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 of the span.

3. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, undue strain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F.

4. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:
a. Upward and downward movement 1 inch.

5. Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials.

C. Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards: Design according to AISI's S100 “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

1. AISI S200 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – General Provisions”.

2. AISI S201 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Product Standard”.

3. AISI S211 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Wall Stud Design”.

4. AISI S212 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Header Design”.

5. AISI S213 “North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing – Lateral Design”.

6. AISI “Code of Standard Practice for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Framing”.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1174
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-6

2.3 COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coating weight as follows:

1. Grade: ST33H for 18 GA and 20 GA, ST50H for 14 GA and 16 GA.

2. Coating: G90 (Z275).

C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows:

1. Grade: 50.

2. Coating: G90.

2.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)].

3. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)].

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.

2. Flange Width: [1-1/2 inches (32 mm)].

C. Headers and Jambs - Manufacturer's proprietary shape used to form header beams and jambs, columns or posts, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; [Heavy Duty Stud (HDS)] and ProX Header].

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)].

3. Web and Flange Widths, Type HDS: [3-5/8 by 3 by 1-1/16 by 3/4 inch (92.1 by 76.2 by

27.0 by 19.1 mm)] [6 by 3 by 2-1/4 by 3/4 inch (152 by 76.2 by 57.2 by 19.1 mm)], Type ProX: Matching wall stud width.

D. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1175
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-7

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)].

2. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)].

E. Opening Framing:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; ProX Header System.

2. Allow for alternative valued engineered opening framing systems (ProX Header System) manufactured by ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

3. Minimum Material Thickness: As required by design.

4. Minimum Flange Width: As required by design.

2.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 GA).

3. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches, 2 inches.

B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch (18 GA)] Matching steel studs.

2. Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches.

A. Headers and Jambs - Manufacturer's proprietary shape used to form header beams and jambs, columns or posts, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; [Heavy Duty Stud (HDS)] and ProX Header].

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)].

3. Web and Flange Widths, Type HDS: [3-5/8 by 3 by 1-1/16 by 3/4 inch (92.1 by 76.2 by

27.0 by 19.1 mm)] [6 by 3 by 2-1/4 by 3/4 inch (152 by 76.2 by 57.2 by 19.1 mm)], Type ProX: Matching wall stud width.

B. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web and capable of resisting forces imposed by the wall system.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1176
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-8

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ClarkDietrich Building Systems; [FCSC] [FCEC] [FTSC] [FTC3] [FTC5] [FS12] [FS15] [FS24] [QC], or a comparable product by one of the members of the SFIA.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Fast Clip Slide Clip; 0.0677 inch, Extended FastClip Slide Clip; 0.0677 inch, Flat Tail Slide Clip; 0.1180 inch, Fast Top Clip; 0.0677 inch, Fast Strut Clip; 0.0677 inch, Quick Clip; 0.1180 inch.

C. Deflection Track and Firestop Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thicknesses not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; BlazeFrame Deflection Track.

D. Slotted Deflection Track: Manufacturer’s single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; punched with vertical slots in both legs. Studs should be positively attached to deep-leg track using vertical slots while allowing free vertical movement. Legs designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Maxtrak Slotted deflection track

2. Standard Leg: 2-1/2 inches, 3 inches

3. Standard Vertical Slot in Leg: 1-1/2 inches, 2-1/2 inches.

4. Minimum Yield Strength and Thickness: 33 ksi: 0.0329 inch, 33 ksi; 0.0428 inch, 50 ksi;

0.0538 inch, 50 ksi; 0.0677 inch.

E. Single Deflection Track (Slip Track): Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure. Install a continuous row of bridging, composed of 1-1/2 inch 16ga coldformed channel secured to each stud with a 16ga EasyClip clip angle, at upper-most knockout, not more than 12 inches from top of wall. Channel and clip may be replaced with Spazzer 5400 where approved by SEOR.

1. Basis-of-Design: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Deep Leg Deflection Track (Slip Track) – Structural

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)].

3. Flange Width: 2-1/2 inch (25 mm)
F. U-Channel: Manufacturer’s standard length.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; U-Channel.

2. Size: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm).

3. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm).

G. Bridging and Spacer Bar:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1177
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-9

1. Basis-of Design-Product:
a. Track blocking: (1-1/2” flange, 16ga) @ 12’-0” max on center w/ 1-1/2” 20ga stap each side of wall. (1)#8 from each strap to each stud, and (3)#8 from each strap to each track block.
b. ClarkDietrich Spazzer 5400 (SPZS)
1) Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm). 2) Size: 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 by 50 inches (32 by 32 by 1270 mm) long, pre-notched at 12, 16 and 24 inches (305, 406, and 610 mm) centers. c. Simpson LSUBH &150U50-54 channel
d. ClarkDietrich FastBridge clips or Swiftclip &150U50-54 channel H. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)]. b. Flange Width: 1 inch (25 mm) plus the design gap for one-story structures.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows:
a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)]. b. Flange Width: <Outer deflection track flange width plus 1 inch (25 mm)>.

I. Drift Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure.

2.6 ROOF-RAFTER FRAMING
A. Steel Rafters: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, with stiffened flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0538 inch (1.37 mm)].

3. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)], minimum.

B. Built-up Members: Built-up members of manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel section, with stiffened flanges, nested into a U-shaped steel section joist track, with unstiffened flanges; unpunched of web depths indicated; and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: Matching steel rafters.

2. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)], minimum.

3. Fasteners: #10@12” placed symmetrically each side, between elements of built-up members unless noted otherwise

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1178
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-10

2.7 CEILING JOIST FRAMING
A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections of web depths indicated, punched with enlarged service holes, with stiffened flanges, and unless noted otherwise on the drawings to be as follows:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: [0.0428 inch (1.09 mm)].

3. Flange Width: [1-5/8 inches (41 mm)], top, 1-5/8 inches (63.4 mm) bottom] minimum.

2.8 FRAMING ACCESSORIES
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.

B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

1. Supplementary framing.

2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.
a. See section 2.5 G

3. Web stiffeners.
a. Basis-of-Design Product: ClarkDietrich Building Systems; QTWS.

4. Anchor clips.

5. End clips.

6. Foundation clips.

7. Gusset plates.

8. Stud kickers and knee braces.

9. Joist hangers and end closures.

10. Hole reinforcing plates.

11. Backer plates.

2.9 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS
A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1179
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-11
B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbonsteel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drill screws.

1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 per ASTM A 780.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404.

Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.

E. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

2.11 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.

2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

3. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1180
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-12
a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-ofsquare tolerance of 1/8 inch (3 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplementary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fireresistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.

D. Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with ASTM C1007 and AISI S200 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions".

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1181
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-13
B. Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.

C. Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

D. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.

1. Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

E. Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened.

1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.

2. Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying with requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

F. Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

G. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

H. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed steel framing.

Independently frame both sides of joints.

I. Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

J. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

K. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1:960) and as follows:

1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm) from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1182
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-14

3.4 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:

1. Anchor Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm) To match stud spacing.

B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch (3 mm) between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 16 inches (610 mm) As indicated on plans.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar configurations.

D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.

F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting structure as indicated.

G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes, and ProX System header components Heavy Duty Stud (HDS) components for jambs as indicated or required to transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or gusset plates.

1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. A single proprietary jamb member designed specifically for the purpose of supporting the header may be used in lieu of multiple members.

2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs.

H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing.

1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight or load resulting from item supported.

I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced vertically [48 inches (1220 mm)] as indicated in plans. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Bridging: Steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs with a minimum of two screws into each flange of the clip angle for framing members up to 6 inches (152.4 mm) deep.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1183
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-15

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

3. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

J. Install steel sheet diagonal bracing straps to both stud flanges, terminate at and fasten to reinforced top and bottom tracks. Fasten clip-angle connectors to multiple studs at ends of bracing and anchor to structure as shown in shop drawings.

K. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wallframing system.

3.5 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated.

B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:

1. Stud Spacing: 24 inches (610 mm), as indicated on plans.

C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.

D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support.

1. Install single leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.

2. Install double deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor outer tracks to building structure.

3. Connect Fast Clip Slide Clip (FCSC) vertical deflection clips to infill studs and anchor to building structure.

4. Connect drift clips to cold-formed metal framing and anchor to building structure.

E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches (1220 mm) apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within [12 inches (305 mm)] of single deflection track. Bridging is not required in top row when using proprietary slotted deflection track BlazeFrame DSL. Install a combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.
a. Install solid blocking at 96-inch (2438.4-mm) centers or as indicated on plans or as indicated on Shop Drawings.

2. Bridging: Cold-formed steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1184
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-16

3. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

4. Bridging: Proprietary bridging bars installed according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

3.6 JOIST INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with AISI's S210 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Floor and Roof System Design".

B. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.

C. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.

1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.

D. Space joists not more than 2 inches (51 mm) from abutting walls, and as follows:

1. Joist Spacing: As indicated on plans.

E. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists, or another combination of connected joists if indicated.

F. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings.

1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.

G. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist intersection as follows:

1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist webs.

2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated. Fasten flat straps to bottom flange of joists and secure solid blocking to joist webs.

H. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1185
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 05 40 00-17
I. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Contractor will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.

C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Engineer.

D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, to ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 05 40 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1186
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing metal fabrications made from steel shapes, plates, sheets, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings not a part of structural steel or specified in other Sections., including but not limited to the following items:

1. Facilities Building Handrails

2. Facilities Building Coiling Door and Wall Vent Trim.

3. Miscellaneous angles, plates, bars, tubes, rods and other metal site landscape items not specified in other Sections but shown or required to complete the work.

B. Related Sections:

1. 03 15 00 Drilled Dowels and Epoxy Anchors.

2. 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3. 03 35 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete Finishing.

4. 05 05 19 Expansion Anchors, Screws and Powder-Actuated Fasteners.

5. 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing.

6. 09 91 00 Painting.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Handrails and Railings: Handrails and railings have been designed, analyzed and detailed to these performance requirements. Contractor shall fabricate and install railings and handrails in compliance with the following performance requirements:

1. Handrails: Capable of withstanding a concentrated load of 200 lbs applied at any direction and point along the handrail, or 50 lbs/ft applied in any direction along the handrail.

2. Handrails and Railings shall comply with ADA requirements.

1.4 STANDARDS
A. Except as modified by governing codes and by the Contract Documents, comply with the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following:

1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code".

2. AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel"

3. ASTM E985 "Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings".

4. NAAMM "Metal Bar Grating Manual".

5. NAAMM "Pipe Railing Manual".

6. NAAMM "Metal Stairs Manual".

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1187
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 2

7. SSPC "Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume 2, Systems and Specifications".

8. Industrial Fasteners Institute "Fastener Standards Book".

9. ANSI A14.3, ANSI A12.1, ANSI A58.1 and Part 1910 of the Occupational Safety and Health Standards (OSHA) as applicable to stairs, ladders, railings and protection of floor openings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Follow procedures outlined in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Include information on steel grade, galvanizing and paint products including color samples, and sealants.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations and details of handrails and metal fabrications.

Show anchorage and accessory items. Furnish templates for anchors and bolts installed under other Sections.

D. Samples: Provide samples of Facilities Building Handrail and Coiling Door/Vent Trim finish.

Provide four (4) paint color samples of finish and color for approval by Owner and Architect prior to beginning paint coating process.

E. Mock Up: Provide Mock-Up to verify dimensions, fit, tolerances, finishes, and installation methods upon request.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the work.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1, D1.2, and D1.3 as applicable. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Recycled Content of Ferrous Steel Products: Provide products with an average recycled content of steel products so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25-percent.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule to avoid delay of work.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Mount handrails only on steel or concrete assemblies reinforced to receive anchors, and where the location of concealed anchor plates has been marked for the installer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1188
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 3
B. Painting: Items specified in this Section as having a shop applied prime coat will be painted as specified in Section 05 50 00, Paragraph 2.5, below.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FERROUS METALS
A. General: Unless otherwise noted in the drawings or specifications, all ferrous metals shall be as identified by type below.

B. Metal Surfaces: For fabrication of metal work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

C. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A572 Grade 50, unless otherwise designated.

Provide hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123. Thickness of galvanized coating shall be in conformance with ASTM A123.

D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, welded or seamless process. Provide hot-dip galvanized tubing in accordance with ASTM A123. Thickness of galvanized coating shall be in conformance with ASTM A123.

E. Galvanized Structural Steel Sheet: ASTM A653, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525, G90 coating designation.

F. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S, Grade A, suitable for close coiling, Duplex Finish (Galvanized then Shop Painted); Extra Strong (XS) weight (Schedule 80S), unless otherwise indicated or required to satisfy performance criteria.

G. Stainless Steel Plate: 304 and 304L ASTM A240, 14 Ga. mill plate, standard finish #4 H. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A48, Class 30.

I. Malleable Iron Castings: ASTM A47, grade selected by fabricator.

2.2 WELDING CONSUMABLES
A. General: Filler materials and fluxes shall conform to requirements of AWS D1.1; of suitable type for base metals being welded and the intended application. Electrodes and equipment settings shall be as recommended by the filler metal manufacturer for the position, thickness or other conditions of actual use. All electrodes and filler metals shall be low hydrogen types.

1. Electrode wire diameter: FCAW wire diameter shall not exceed the values specified in AWS D1.1., Section 4.14.1

2. For Weathering Steel: Provide 8018-C3, low alloy, low hydrogen electrode, intended for use with weathering steel; or approved equal.

2.3 FASTENERS:

A. All Fasteners shall be Hot-Dip Galvanized per ASTM A-153 or ASTM F-2329 or A316 Stainless Steel per ASTM F593 as called out on plans or specifications.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1189
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 4
B. Bolts and Nuts: hot-dip galvanized finish, Regular hexagon-head bolts ASTM A325 (F3125), Type 1, with Heavy Hex Nuts ASTM A563 Grade DH, and flat washers.

C. Machine Screws: stainless steel, ANSI B18.6.3.

D. Lag Bolts: hot-dip galvanized finish, ANSI B18.2.1.

E. Wood Screws: Flat head, stainless steel, ANSI B18.6.1.

F. Plain Washers: Round, hot-dip galvanized finish, ANSI B18.22.1.

G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, hot-dip galvanized finish, ANSI B18.21.1.

H. Expansion Anchors: Refer to specifications Section 03 25 50, Expansion Anchors.

2.4 GROUT
A. Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout:

1. Master Builders Technologies, Inc. "Masterflow 928 and 713" or approved equal.

2. Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions

2.5 PAINT
A. All steel handrails and railings, including all embedded sleeves and plates to be Duplex System Finish steel. Provide primer and finish paint as supplied by a single manufacturer from the entire project as specified below:

1. Metal primer for Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: Compatible with finish coats of paint; shop apply to the respective dry film mil thickness specified: Tnemec Co. Inc. “Series 161HS Tneme-Fascure”; 2.0-3.0 mils D.F.T. per Tnemec recommendations, or approved equal.

2. Exposed to view items to be field painted for repairs shall be primed with a primer compatible with final finish coat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel. Rust-Oleum Corp. “Zinc-Rich Cold Galvanizing Compound”, Tnemec 90- 93, ZRC Worldwide “Galvalite” or approved equal. COV content shall not exceed 420 g/L.

C. Final coats for hot-dip galvanized handrails, guardrails and railings as indicated on drawings: Modified Polycarbamide two shop applied coats: Tnemec Co. Inc. UVX Series 750, 2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat per Tnemec recommendations or approved equal.

Submit color samples for approval.

1. Railing and Handrail, Coiling Door and Wall Vent Trim: Contractor shall provide four (4) dark gray color site samples painted on actual metal work for approval by OWNER and Architect prior to beginning coating process. Colors shall include:
a. ALT 1 Moon Shadow TNEMEC 48GR
b. ALT 2 Deep Space TNEMEC 34GR
c. ALT 3 No. 2 Pencil TNEMEC 47GR

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1190
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 5
d. ALT 4 Custom RAL 7037 Dusty Gray
B. Ferrous Steel - Bare

1. Shop or Field Primer: Series 94-H2O, Hydro-Zinc, 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. VOC content shall not exceed 400 g/L.
a. All hot-dip galvanized steel bars: Compatible with finish coats of paint; shop apply to the respective dry film mil thickness specified: Tnemec Co. Inc. "94-H2O, HydroZinc "; 2.5 – 3.5 mils D.F.T. per Tnemec recommendations or approved equal. b. Exposed to view items to be field painted for repairs shall be primed with a primer compatible with final finish coats specified in Section 05 50 00

2. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for re-galvanizing welds in galvanized steel; Rust-Oleum Corp. "Zinc-Rich Cold Galvanizing Compound", Tnemec 90-93, ZRC Worldwide "Galvalite” or approved equal. VOC content shall not exceed 420 g/L.

3. Stripe-Coat Procedure: Series 1095 | Endura-Shield; brush-applied to all welds, voids, nuts, bolts and sharp edges and areas inaccessible to roller application referencing SSPC-PA 1, 6.6 Striping

4. Intermediate: Tnemec Series 1095 | Endura-Shield (Color TBD); 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT per coat

5. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series 1071V | Fluoronar semi-gloss (Color TBD by Owner); 2.5 to

3.5 mils DFT.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Pre-assembly items in the shop to the greatest extent practical. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.

B. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, of required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability for intended use.

C. Welding:

1. Weld corners and seams continuously, making welds as smooth as practical. Grind welds at corners only as necessary to remove sharps. Grind butt welds smooth and flush.

2. Weld in accordance with AWS D1.1 using manual shielded arc method (SMAW), flux cored arc method (FCAW), or gas shielded arc method (GMAW).

3. Weld in accordance with welding procedure specifications (WPS’s) for joint.

4. Groove welds shall be complete joint penetration welds, unless designated otherwise on drawings. Groove preparation is at Contractor's option, subject to qualification in accordance with AWS D1.1.

D. Workmanship:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1191
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 6

1. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended.

2. Work to dimensions indicated,

3. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight, sharp edges.

4. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32-inch, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Welds shall be imperceptible in the finished work.

6. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use Phillips flat - headcounter sunk screws or bolts for exposed fasteners, unless tamperproof security screws are indicated.

7. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items.

8. Fabricate joints exposed to the weather to exclude water or provide weep holes.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS
A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports:

1. Provide miscellaneous framing and supports not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.

2. Fabricate to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or required.

3. Fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection.

4. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

5. Furnish integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry.

2.8 DUPLEX SYSTEM FINISH
A. General: All railings, handrails, and trim at coiling door and wall vents shall be a Duplex System Finish of Shop Powder Coated PER AAMA 2605 over Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated in accordance with ASTM D7803 for all ferrous components.

B. Surface Preparation:

1. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning", prior to any additional surface preparation specified.

2. Clean and prepare metal surfaces. Remove weld splatters, rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning".

3. Remove remaining mill scale and rust by methods specified in SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". Power tool cleaning and pickling may be omitted from work fabricated from castings, provided surfaces are not heavily rusted.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1192
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 7

4. Commercial Blast Clean the surface in accordance with SSPC SP-6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning” once surfaces have been degreased and mill scale removed.

5. Weld seams, metal slivers and sharp edges revealed by the blasting process shall be ground down.

C. Galvanizing: Provide zinc coating for items indicated or specified to be hot-dip galvanized, as follows:

1. Comply with ASTM A123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and all steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes, plates, bars, pipes and strip 1/8 in. thick and heavier and for assembled steel products.

2. Comply with ASTM A153, Classes A and B, for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

D. Shop Applied Coatings (over Galvanized Coatings):

1. General: Duplex System powder coating shall provide corrosion protection, UV color as well as sheen stability. Apply per manufacturer’s recommendations: Tnemec Inc.

Representative Contact: Carl J. Bowers of Amos and Associates, (415) 264-7528, [email protected].

2. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded and stainless steel, unless otherwise specified.

3. Surface Preparation (of Galvanized Surface): Prepare galvanized metal surface in accordance with ASTM D6386 or D7803 as applicable to remove all loose zinc oxide or zinc hydroxide particles and to prevent all adhesion problems from occurring.
a. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning", prior to any additional surface preparation specified. b. All hot-dip galvanized metal screens and gates shall be Brush-Off Blasted before painting in accordance with SSPC-SP16 to create no less than a 1.0 mil dense and uniform surface profile / anchor pattern. Surfaces shall be clean, dry and roughened.

4. Application: Do not coat/paint when ambient temperature is below 40 degree Fahrenheit. Paint in dry weather or under cover; paint over dry rust-free surfaces.

Stir paint and keep at uniform consistency during application. Apply paint by spray per manufacturer's directions to a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (approximately 370-375 SF of surface per gallon); do not thin paint in excess of manufacturer's recommendations. Allow paint to dry before handling or shipment.

5. Immediately after surface preparation, spray on a maximum of two (2) shop applied coats of primer to all fabricated metal items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, at a rate of 2.0 mils D.F.T. thickness for each coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage and dry film thickness specified.

6. Spray on two (2) final shop applied coats at a rate of 2.0 – 3.0 mils D.F.T. thickness for each coat of finish paint to entire surfaces as noted or specified. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first coat. Use painting methods which will result in full coverage and dry film thickness specified.

7. Separate dissimilar metals with one coat of dielectric separator. Do not extend coating onto exposed or finished surfaces.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1193
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 8

2.8 HOT DIP GALVANIZED Finish
A. General: All Steel Handrails and Railings Finish shall be a Hot-Dip Galvanized Coated in accordance with ASTM D7803 for all steel railings, guardrails, and handrails, including tubing, fittings, supports, brackets, sleeves, embedded plates, fasteners, and all other ferrous components.

B. Surface Preparation:

1. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1 "Solvent Cleaning", prior to any additional surface preparation specified.

2. Clean and prepare metal surfaces. Remove weld splatters, rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-3 "Power Tool Cleaning".

4. Commercial Blast Clean the surface in accordance with SSPC SP-6 “Commercial Blast Cleaning” once surfaces have been degreased and mill scale removed.

5. Weld seams, metal slivers and sharp edges revealed by the blasting process shall be ground down.

C. Galvanizing: Provide zinc coating for items indicated or specified to be hot-dip galvanized, as follows:

2. Comply with ASTM A153, Classes A and B, for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, such as concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts and miscellaneous items having integral anchors.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General:

1. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws and other connectors as required.

2. Cutting, Fitting and Placement:
a. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications.
b. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1194
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 9
c. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items to be built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.

3. Fit exposed connections together forming tight hairline joints. a. Weld connections not shop welded.
b. Grind exposed joints smooth and imperceptible, and touch-up shop paint coat. c. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and intended for bolted or screwed field connections. d. When cutting, grinding, or machining Stainless Steel, use clean blades and grinders that have not been used on Carbon Steel to avoid future corrosion effects from microscopic Carbon Steel deposited on the Stainless Steel.

4. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Welding Code for procedures related to field welding as related to appearance and quality of welds made and for methods used in correcting welding work. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. Remove welding flux immediately. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches those adjacent

5. Install prefabricated items in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Setting Loose Plates:

1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve surface bond. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

2. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices.

3. Tighten anchor bolts after the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed.

4. Cut-off protruding ends of wedges flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout.

5. Use metallic non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations.

6. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure no voids remain.

C. Steel Tube Railings and Handrails:

1. Adjust railings prior to anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.

2. Space posts as indicated on plans.

3. Plumb posts in each direction.

4. Anchor posts in concrete with pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts are inserted in sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions.

5. Anchor posts to steel as indicated on plans.

6. Anchor rail ends into concrete as indicated on plans.

7. Anchor rail ends to steel as indicated on plans.

8. Provide removable railing sections where indicated. Furnish slip-fit metal socket or sleeve for casting into concrete. Locate sleeves to match post spacing.

9. Secure handrails to wall with wall supports and end fittings, as indicated on plans.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1195
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00 - 10
a. Locate supports as indicated on plans.

10. Expansion Joints: Provide at intervals not exceeding 40-feet. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending 2-inches beyond joint on either side; fasten internal sleeve securely to one side; locate joint within 6-inches of posts.

3.4 TOLERANCES
A. Railing and Handrail, Coiling Door and Wall Vent Trim:

1. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Touch-Up Painting of Duplex Galvanized and Paint Coated Surfaces: Immediately after erection, thoroughly clean surfaces, clean field welds, bolted connections, marred and abraded areas. Paint and touch-up paint with the specified paint system. Apply spot prime by brush or spray with specified primer to provide minimum dry film thickness specified. Apply specified final paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness specified.

B. Touch up galvanized surfaces in accordance with ASTM A780.

END OF SECTION 05 50 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1196
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 057210 - 1
Landscape Metal Fabrications
SECTION 057210 – LANDSCAPE METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Custom bench armrests, backrests, and wood support.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 034801 Site Precast Concrete (custom bench)
B. Section 064013 Landscape Woodwork (custom bench)
C. Section 323300 Site Furnishings (custom bench)
D. Section 099623 Anti-graffiti Coating (custom bench)

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance for armrests, backrests, and wood support: Provide armrests and backrests capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.

B. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work.

1. For Custom Bench armrests, backrests, and wood support, provide shop drawings and calculations prepared by a Professional Engineer in the State of California.

C. Samples: For each exposed finish and metal stock shape required.

1. Provide sample photographs and video of armrest, backrest, and wood support.

2. Provide physical sample of finish and weld.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1197
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 057210 - 2
Landscape Metal Fabrications

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Owner’s Authorized Representative, except with Owner’s Authorized Representative's approval.

B. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage testing agency to test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935. Payment will be made by Owner.

1. Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at fabricator’s facility of entire assembly of armrest, backrest, and wood support and anchorage system components. Provide sample photographs and video.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS
A. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Stainless Steel:

1. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 316L.

2. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 316L.

3. Plate and Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 316L.

4. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners: Provide concealed fasteners, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners.

2. Steel Components: Plated-steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 25 for electrodeposited zinc coating.

B. Anchors: Provide cast-in-place or torque-controlled expansion anchors, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488.

C. Grout and Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonmetallic grout complying with ASTM C 1107, or water-resistant, nonshrink, anchoring cement; recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1198
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 057210 - 3
Landscape Metal Fabrications

2.3 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with design, dimensions, and details indicated, but not less than that required to support structural loads.

B. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.

C. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.

D. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Powdercoating all parts: Color RAL 7024 Graphite Grey

2.5 ATTACHMENTS
A. Provide hidden, tamper-proof fasteners.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FABRICATION
A. Form metal fabrications true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.

B. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Clean exposed welded joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation.

1. Set backrests and armrests plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).

B. Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular space.

C. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing to in-place construction.

END OF SECTION 057210

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1199
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 1
SECTION 06 10 00 – ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: Rough carpentry, light hardware, and miscellaneous items of work not included in another Section. This Section also includes:

1. Roof framing.

2. Structural wood supports, grounds, backing, and blocking required for millwork and casework items and which are an integral part of wall, floor and/or ceiling construction.

3. Wood cants, stops, and nailers for roof as may be required.

4. Wood blocking, backing, and nailers for flashings and sheet metal work.

5. Plywood backboards for electrical equipment.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED IN OTHER SECTIONS

1. Concrete Formwork: Section 03 10 00

2. Cast-in-Place Concrete Section 03 30 00.

3. Structural Steel Framing: Section 05 12 00

4. Thermal Insulation Section 07 21 00.

5. Joint Sealants Section 07 92 00.

6. Access Doors and Panels Section 08 31 00.

7. Door Hardware Section 08 71 00.

8. Non-Structural Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 09 22 16.

1.4 REFERENCES, CODES AND STANDARDS
The following references, codes and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and carpentry work shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as permitting work that is contrary to code requirements.

A. “Standard Grading and Dressing Rules #17,” of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Current Edition, with current supplements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1200
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 2
B. “Western Lumber Grading Rules,” of the Western Wood Products Assn., current edition, with current supplements.

C. “Plywood Design Specification” PS1, American Plywood Association, Current edition.

D. American Wood Protection Assn. (AWPA) UCS Standard, “User Specification for Treated Wood U1-21”.

E. American Wood Protection Assn. (AWPA) UCS Standard “Processing and Treatment Standard T1-21”.

F. American Wood Preservers Bureau (AWPB) Quality Control Standards.

G. Factory Manual Global’s Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49, “Perimeter Flashing”, latest edition.

H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), ASTM E 84.

I. California Building Code, Current Edition, Chapter 23.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Lumber and plywood shall be grade or quality marked by WWPA, WCLIB, APA, AWPA, UL 30 Min. ASTM E 84 test or by other grading and inspection agencies acceptable to the Engineer.

Grade marks shall include the designation “S-DRY” (or “MC-15” as applies) where applicable.

Grade and quality marks shall not be apparent on surfaces exposed in the finish work.

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE
Store kiln dried materials, in enclosed areas, protected from moisture and separated from contact with concrete or soil.

1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions (GP 4.19).

B. Provide documentation certifying that wood products were obtained from forests verified by an FSC accredited certification body. Include statement indicating costs.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Temporary Construction: Clean lumber at Contractor’s option, rough or smooth as usage requires, strength as required for purpose.

B. Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) Certified: All wood shall be FSC Certified and shall be obtained from forests verified by an FSC accredited certification body.

C. All Exterior Exposed lumber: Western Red Cedar No. 2 or Better Clear, S4S, no knots or Sap.

D. Framing Lumber Not Otherwise Specified or Noted: Douglas Fir or Larch graded and

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1201
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 3
grade marked according to Reference Standard 1.4 A or B. Maximum bow, crook, and cup shall be as established by WWPA Para. 752.00 for “Light” or better.

Item Grade Reference (WCLIB)
Studs See drawings
Beams 4x and Larger No. 1 123 (c) and 130 (b)
Joists and Rafters No. 1 123 (c)
Posts and Columns No. 1 131 (b)
Other members No. 2 123 (d)
Reclaimed 2x Wall
Framing
Graded, Use No. 2 or better. (Not
for Shear Walls (3x required))

1. Boards: Construction Grade.

2. Sill Plates (on Concrete or Concrete Masonry): Construction Grade Light Framing, pressure treated as hereinafter specified.

E. Plywood: Each panel shall be identified with the appropriate grade-trademark of the American Plywood Association (APA) and shall meet the requirements of Reference Standard 1.4 C.

1. Miscellaneous Not Otherwise Specified (Concealed): CD or better and free of defects, which would adversely affect finish materials.

2. Miscellaneous (Exposed): “A” face or better.

3. Exterior plywood, interior plywood exposed to continuing moisture, and pressure treated plywood shall be fabricated with exterior glue. Plywood with interior glue shall be fully protected from soaking or continuing moisture at all times and shall not be used for any structural purposes.

4. Roof and Wall Sheathing not noted as “Structural I”: APA Rated Sheathing CD, Exposure 1 with proper span rating. Wall sheathing under cement plaster shall have a 24/0 or Wall-24 span rating for framing at 16” O.C. and a minimum 24/0, 7/16” or thicker for framing 24” O.C.

5. Roof and Wall Sheathing noted as “Structural I”: Structural I-CD, all veneers Group 1 species.

F. Rough Hardware: All hardware to be hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel.

1. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307 (a) and A 563 (a), Grade A.

2. Lag Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-561.

3. Nails: Fed. Spec. FF-N-101, common unless otherwise noted or specified.

4. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Hilti, Simpson Strong Tie, or approved equivalent, unless otherwise noted, galvanized.

5. Heavy Timber Column Only Connection Washers: Malleable Cast Iron Hot-Dip Galvanized Washers, Portland Bolt or approved equal.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1202
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 4

6. Round Plate Washers: ASTM F844, Current Edition.

7. Post- Installed Bolts: Simpson Strong Tie, Hilti, or approved equivalent. See also Section 03 15 00 Drilled Dowels & Epoxy Anchors.

8. Self Tapping Screws: Stainless steel screws.

9. Self Drilling Screws: Simpson Strong Tie SDS galvanized wood screws, or approved equivalent.

G. Pressure Treatment (Decay and Termite Prevention):

1. Pressure treat for decay and termite prevention, wood materials, which are embedded in or set against concrete, masonry, plaster, or roofing, or where otherwise exposed to continuing dampness or moisture required by California Building Code. Where materials are also required to be treated for fire retardance, fire retardant shall be in lieu of decay and termite treatment.

2. Treat in accord with Reference Standard 1.02 D and E quality marked as per Reference Standard 1.02 F.

3. Treat with either of the following processes at Contractor option except do not use waterborne salts where wood is in contact with built-up roofing and other bituminous products. Creosote type preservatives are not permitted. a. Alkaline Copper Quatenary (ACQ) 0.6 retention or ACZA. b. Members treated with waterborne salts shall be dried to a moisture content not exceeding 19% after treatment.

4. Where possible, pre-cut material before treatment.

5. Holes and cut-offs and handling and storage shall be in accord with AWPA M-4.

6. Ensure that ferrous metal fastenings and items in contact with wood treated with waterborne salts are hot dip galvanized (1.25 oz. coating).

2.2 MOISTURE CONTENT
At time of closing in: 15% maximum for 2x thickness or less; 19% maximum for thickness greater than 2x, and 22% maximum thickness greater than 4x.

2.3 SIZES:

Surfaced to “Dry” sizes. Sizes noted are nominal unless shown as net.

2.4 SURFACING:

S4S unless noted or specified elsewhere.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1203
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION:

A. Bridging and Blocking: Conform to CBC Sections 2308.4.6, 2308.5.7, 2308.6.7.2 and 2308.7.8. Provide 2x blocking at intersections of finished surfaces for adequate bearing and at points where required for internal support of fixtures, cabinets, hardware, and other equipment suspended from ceiling or mounted on walls. Provide fireblocking and draftstopping as per CBC Section 718.2 and 1405.1.3 and 717.4. Provide vent holes in blocking at concealed areas per the Drawings as required.

B. Connections and Fastenings: Conform to Section 2304.10 California Building Code, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, conform to minimum nailing requirements of Table 2304.10.2. For bolted connections, provide washers under heads and nuts bearing on wood, and draw nuts tight. Retighten before closing in framing.

C. Coordinate with Roofing Section and provide treated cants, stops, roof drains and flashings in accord with roofing manufacturer’s requirements. Fit cant strips flush at ends and to wall surfaces corner mitered.

D. Wood cants, blocking, backing, and nailers for perimeter sheet metal flashings shall be anchored in accord with recommendations contained in Reference Standard 1.4 G.

E. Sill Plates: Conform to Section 2308.3.1 California Building Code, unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings. Sill plates on concrete shall be 3x6 pressure treated (decay and termite) Douglas fir or Larch. Unless otherwise noted, plates shall be attached with a minimum of 5/8” diameter steel anchor bolts at a maximum spacing of 4’- 0” O.C. with a minimum of two bolts per piece of sill plate and a bolt located not more than 12” or less than 4” of each end of each piece. Plate washers shall be not less than

0.229 inch by 3 inches by 3 inches (5.82 mm by 76 mm by 76mm) in size.

A. Framing: Conform to CBC Sec. 2304.3, 2304.4 and 2308.4 where these sections cover points not indicated in the Drawings. Properly lay out framing with pieces closely fitted, accurately plumbed, leveled and aligned, and rigidly secured in place. Select corner studs and trimmers free of crook, twist or bow; plates free from perceptible variations from straight line. Locate studs for proper installation of finish, trim, cabinets, fixtures, piping, and other work. Set joists and beams with crown up. Vent roof framing as required to provide circulation of outside air in encased spaces above ceiling or soffit. Set headers on edge, doubled and supported at each end by cripples unless otherwise shown. Frame walls with piping and conduits to provide clearances for same. Fur walls or reinforcing plates and sills with metal as required for rigidity and bearing of finishes.

G. Plywood (General): Unless more stringent requirements are indicated on the Drawings or required by Code, application and nailing of plywood shall be in accord with recommendations of the American Plywood Association. Use full 4’ x 8” sheets wherever possible to minimize joints, with minimum sheet size at any vent in either direction to be 24”.

1. Roof Sheathing: Unless otherwise indicated, install with long dimension of panel across supports with panel continuous over two or more spans. Stagger end joints and locate over framing. Allow 1/8” spacing at panel ends and ¼” at panel edges unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer.

2. Wall Sheathing: Allow 1/8” spacing at panel ends and ¼” at panel edges unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. Where used under cement plaster,

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1204
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 6
install with long dimension or strength axis across studs with panel continuous over two or more stud spaces. Install blocking or plywood cleats at all horizontal joints.

H. Flashing (Paper): Install flashing strips of duplex building paper (9” minimum width) at periphery of cased openings in exterior walls. Weather lap, fold and turn in under sills.

I. Plywood Soffits and Paneling: Allow 1/8” spacing at panel ends and edges unless otherwise recommended by panel manufacturer. Nail with hot dip galvanized siding nails. Use 6d for ½” and less material and 8d for greater thickness. Where plywood is applied over backing, make nail length sufficient for penetration of ½” length in bearing.

Space nails 6” O.C.. at panel edges and 12” O.C.. at intermediate bearings. Align in both directions. Locate joints only when indicated on Drawings. Transverse joints will not be permitted unless specifically shown. Install soffit vents to fit neatly, plywood edges fully concealed, and joints of vent units butted.

J. All Foundation Plates or Sills and Sleepers on concrete or masonry foundations which is in direct contact with earth shall be treated wood or foundation grade redwood, all marked by an approved agency.

K. Any wood located nearer than 6 inches to the earth shall be treated wood or wood of natural resistance to decay.

L. Columns and posts located on concrete or masonry floors or decks exposed to the weather or to the water splash or in basements supporting permanent structures shall be supported by concrete piers or metal pedestals projecting at least 6 inches above exposed earth or 1 inch above the floor unless wood of natural resistance to decay or treated wood is used.

M. Provide minimum 18-inch clearance under floor joists and 12 inches under girders.

N. Positive connection shall be provided between post and beam or girder construction.

O. Fire stops at Ducts and Air Transfer Openings shall be provided in the following locations per CBC Section 717.

1. Concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, included furred spaces, at the ceiling and floor levels and at 10 foot intervals both vertical and horizontal.

2. At all interconnections between vertical and horizontal spaces such as soffits, drop and cave ceilings.

3. In concealed spaces between stair stringers at the top and bottom of the run and between studs along and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the stairs are unfinished.

4. In openings around vents, pipes, ducts, chimneys, fireplaces and similar openings that afford a passage for fire at the ceiling and floor levels, with noncombustible materials.

5. At openings between attic spaces and chimney chases for factory-built chimneys.

P. All materials shall be approved grade and identified by a grade mark.

Q. Minimum nailing of structural members shall be in accordance with CBC Table 2304.10.2.

R. Allowable Spans shall be in accordance with CBC Chapter 23 for floor joists (Tables

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1205
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A

WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00 - 7
2308.4.2.1), ceiling joists (Tables 2308.7.1), and rafters (Tables 2308.7.2).

S. Floor Joists shall be supported laterally at the ends and at each support by solid blocking.

T. The size, height, and spacing of studs shall be in accordance with CBC Chapter 23 Table 2308.5.1 unless noted otherwise
U. Studs shall be placed with their side dimension perpendicular to the wall.

V. Bearing stud walls shall have double top plates and a single bottom plate the full width of the studs.

W. A wood framed building shall be minimally and adequately braced per CBC Chapter 23 Section 2308, unless otherwise shown and noted on the plans.

X. Rafters shall be framed directly opposite each other at the ridge.

Y. Provide a minimum one-half inch air space around sides and ends of girders entering masonry or concrete.

AA. Provide a minimum of one and one-half inch bearing for joists resting on wood or metal not less than three inches on masonry.

BB. Provide a minimum of 3-inch bearing for ends of beams or girders supported on masonry or concrete.

CC. Joists under and parallel to partitions shall be doubled.

DD. Trimmer and header joists shall be doubled or of lumber of equivalent cross section when the span exceeds four feet.

EE. The ends of header joists more than six feet long shall be supported by framing anchors or joist hangers unless bearing on a beam, partition or wall.

FF. Trimmer and header rafters framing around openings shall be doubled, or of lumber of equivalent cross section when the span of the header exceeds 4 feet. The ends of the header rafters more than 6 feet long shall be supported by framing anchors or rafter hangers unless bearing on a beam, partition or wall.

GG. Lateral support shall be provided for studs in bearing walls over 10 feet in height per Table 2308.5.1.

END OF SECTION 06 10 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1206
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 1
SECTION 06 16 43 – GYPSUM SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Special Provisions, and other Technical Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Section Includes: Fiberglass-mat faced, moisture resistant exterior use gypsum sheathing ford exterior soffits and walls.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing

2. 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry

3. 07 25 00 Weather Barriers

4. 07 51 13 Built-Up Asphalt Roofing

5. 09 29 00 Gypsum Board

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C473 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.

2. ASTM C518 Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

3. ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs.

4. ASTM C1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.

5. ASTM C1280 Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing.

6. ASTM E72 Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for Building Construction.

7. ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

8. ASTM C 1396: Standard Specification for Gypsum Board.

9. ASTM D 226: Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

10. ASTM E 84: Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

11. ASTM E 119: Test Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1207
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 2

12. ASTM E 1677: Standard Specification for an Air Retarder (AR) Material or System for LowRise Framed Building Walls.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s specifications and installation instructions for each product specified.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide products that offer twelve months of coverage against in-place exposure damage (delamination, deterioration and decay).

B. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

1. Five years against manufacturing defects.

2. Ten years against manufacturing defects when used as a substrate in architecturally specified porcelain rainscreen system.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Resistance Rated Assembly Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in accordance to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL Fire Resistance Directory.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC

1. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: DensGlass Gold Exterior Board.

2. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: DensDeck Prime Roof Board.

B. CertainTeed Saint-Gobain

1. Fiberglass Faced Fire Resistant Gypsum Sheathing: GlasRoc.

C. USG

1. Securock® Brand UltraLight Glass-Mat Sheathing Firecode® X

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Fire-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Board: ASTM C1177, Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.

2. Width: 4 feet.

3. Length: 8 feet.

4. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. ft.

5. Surfacing: Fiberglass Mat.

6. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 100 lbf, minimum.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1208
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 3

7. Flute Span (ASTM E661): 8 inches.

8. Permeance (ASTM E96): Greater than 32 perms.

9. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.67.

10. Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Less than 10 percent of weight.

11. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Nominal 2.5 grams.

12. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): Nominal 900 pounds per square inch.

13. Flame Spread/ Smoke Development (ASTM E84): Not more than 0 Flame Spread, 0 Smoke Development

14. Combustibility (ASTM E136): Noncombustible

15. Fire resistance rating (UL 790 and ASTM E108): Class A

16. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): Scored a 10

17. Acceptable Products:
a. 5/8 inch DensGlass Gold and DensDeck Roof Boards, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. (Facilities Building Roof Cover Boards)
b. 1/4 inch DensGlass Gold and DensDeck Roof Boards, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. (Canopy Roof Cover Boards)
b. 5/8 inch GlasRoc Exterior Sheathing, CertainTeed Saint-Gobain. c. 5/8 inch Securock® Brand UltraLight Glass-Mat Sheathing Firecode® X

2.3 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and application.

B. Nails: 11-gauge hot-dipped galvanized roofing nails 1-3/4 inch, 7/16 inch diameter head – (Minimum).

C. Wood Screws: # 6 1-5/8 inch with a corrosion-resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117 (Minimum).

D. Screws for Fastening Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing:

1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing with #6 or larger screws w/ a minimum of 3 exposed threads on the back of connected part(s). Screws to comply with ASTM C 1002, with corrosion-resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117 (Minimum).

2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing with #6 or larger screws w/ a minimum of 3 exposed threads on the back of connected part(s). Screws to comply with ASTM C 954, with corrosion-resistance of more than 800 hours per ASTM B117 (Minimum).

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sealant for Glass Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutralcuring silicone joint sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials.

B. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing.

C. Sheathing Tape for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Self –adhering, glass fiber tape, minimum 2” wide for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing board.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1209
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 4
D. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film.

E. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible flashing for substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:

1. Inspection: Verify that project conditions and substrates are acceptable, to the installer, prior to beginning installation of work of this section.

3.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. All materials shall be delivered in their original unopened packages and stored in an enclosed shelter providing protection from damage and exposure to the elements. WARNING: Store all Sheathing flat. Panels are heavy and can fall over, causing serious injury or death. Do not move unless authorized.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. General: In accordance with ASTM C1280, GA-253 and the manufacturer’s written instructions.

1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations:
a. Current “Product Catalog”, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum.
b. Installation Guides, CertainTeed Saint-Gobain.
c. Installation Guides, USG.

B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit closely against abutting construction, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

E. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

3.4 SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with ASTM C 1280, GA-253 and manufacturer's written instructions. p

1. Fasten sheathing to wood framing with screws.

2. Fasten sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.

3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.

4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1210
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 5
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into facing.

C. Sheathing may be installed with the long dimension of the sheathing either parallel or perpendicular to framing. Board orientation to be dictated by performance requirements. Abut ends and/or edges of the boards centered over face of framing members. Offset board joints by not less than one stud spacing

1. Space fasteners a maximum of 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. Adjust spacing of fasteners to meet specific fire or structural performance requirements.

2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

3.5 WEATHER-RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:

1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at expansion- or control-joint locations.

2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.

C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.

2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.

3.6 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.

1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.

3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.

4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.

5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect gypsum board installations from damage and deterioration until date of Substantial Completion.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1211
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set GYPSUM SHEATHING 06 16 43 - 6
END OF SECTION 06 16 43

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1212
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 1 Cross-Laminated Timber
SECTION 061719

CROSS-LAMINATED TIMBER (CLT)
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section is intended to supplement the detailed Structural General Notes, references and requirements for this Project as described in the Structural Drawings prepared by the Structural Engineer of Record (SER). Where content of this Section may appear to conflict with specific standards or requirements for Work of this Section, the Notes and Requirements of the Structural Drawings shall always govern.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cross-laminated timber (CLT) wall, floor, and roof panels.

2. Connection hardware.

B. Building Codes:

1. As specified in the Structural Drawings.

C. Related Sections:

1. 051200 – Structural Steel Framing

2. 061800 – Glued-Laminated Construction

3. Division 09 – Coatings.

D. Definitions:

E. “Design Professionals” – Owner’s Architect of Record (AOR) and Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR).

F. “Manufacturer” – Producer for the CLT.

G. “Fabricator” – Fabricator for the CLT.

H. “Installer” – Installer/erector for the CLT.

I. “Contractor” – Any of the following: General Contractor and their subcontractors, Construction Manager, Manufacturer, Fabricator, or Installer.

J. “DDE” – Delegated Design Engineer under the chosen Contractor for the timber scope.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1213
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 2 Cross-Laminated Timber

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General: Comply with the provisions of the latest versions of the publications listed below except as otherwise shown or specified.

B. The Building Code as defined in the Structural Drawings.

C. APA PRG 320-2012 - Standard for Performance-Rated Cross-Laminated Timber.

D. European Technical Approvals.

E. NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2017 Edition.

F. ANSI/AWC NDS-2012 National Design Specification for Wood Construction.

G. CSA O141-05 (R2014) - Softwood Lumber.

H. ASTM Standard D 245-06 (2011), Standard Practice for Establishing Structural Grades and Related Allowable Properties for Visually Graded Lumber - Softwood Lumber.

I. ASTM A153/A153M-09 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

J. EN 1995-1-1:2008 - Eurocode 5: Design of timber structures K. EN 14081-1 Timber structures - Strength graded structural timber with rectangular cross section L. EN 338:2016 Structural timber. Strength classes
M. EN 15497:2014 Structural finger jointed solid timber. Performance requirements and minimum production requirements

1.4 MANUFACTURER, FABRICATOR, AND INSTALLER PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS
A. Below is a list of approved companies for the manufacturing, fabrication, and installation of the CLT. Refer to the fabrication level engineering drawings (shop drawings) produced by StructureCraft.

1. Carpentry Plus

2. Cascade Joinery

3. Kinsol
B. Connection Design: Connection design has been completed and documented by StructureCraft.

No modifications to the connections are permitted.

C. Erection Procedures, Lifting Procedures and Temporary Stability of the CLT: Erection engineering for the CLT is delegated to the DDE. The delegated design shall comply with all applicable building codes/design standards, project-specific requirements, and the performance criteria set forth in this section.

1. General: Delegate design shall include the engineering and coordination of the erection sequence, lifting and temporary bracing requirements during the construction of the CLT.

This includes the design of temporary systems, methods, and equipment necessary to safely erect and stabilize the CLT until the permanent structure and connections are in place.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1214
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 3 Cross-Laminated Timber

2. Erection Engineering Scope: DDE shall be responsible for providing a comprehensive erection engineering design that addresses all aspects of lifting, positioning, and bracing of the CLT during construction. Scope shall include, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Lifting and Handling: Design of lifting and rigging systems, including the selection of lifting points, methods, and temporary supports required for safe hoisting and placement of glulam elements. This includes any specific equipment (e.g., cranes, rigging hardware) necessary for handling individual members or large assembled sections.
b. Temporary Bracing: Design of temporary bracing and stabilization systems for the CLT during erection. This includes the design of bracing to resist lateral forces (e.g., wind, construction loads) and prevent instability of the structure during assembly.
c. Erection Sequence: Development of a detailed erection sequence and methodology, considering the overall structural system, building geometry, and critical path for construction.
d. Temporary Connections and Supports: Design of temporary connections, supports, and anchorages required during erection, ensuring they provide adequate strength and stability until permanent connections are installed. e. Coordination with Permanent Systems: Design of temporary bracing and lifting systems shall be coordinated with the permanent structural design to ensure that loads and forces from the temporary systems are properly accounted for and do not affect the integrity of the permanent structure.

3. Performance Criteria: Erection engineering design shall meet the following performance criteria:
a. Safety: All systems shall be designed to ensure the safety of workers during the erection process. This includes considerations for stability, load transfer, and temporary member restraint.
b. Load Resistance: Temporary bracing and lifting systems shall be capable of resisting the forces during and induced by construction activities, including wind, seismic events (if applicable), and other temporary loads. c. Constructability: Design shall consider ease of installation, minimize the number of components required for temporary systems, and avoid conflicts with other construction activities or trades.
d. Minimization of Damage: Temporary systems shall be designed to minimize any potential damage to glulam members during the erection process, including the prevention of over-stressing or distortion of the material.

D. Alternate Sizes and Species: CLT shown on the Structural Drawings is based on species indicated. At the Contractor’s option, alternate member species at the same dimensions shown on the drawings are permitted, where accepted by the Design Professionals, if shown to be structurally equivalent by the DDE.

E. Design Deviations: Design deviations will be permitted only after acceptance in writing by the Design Professionals.

F. Calculations: DDE calculations shall be performed and sealed by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of California with at least 5 years of experience in CLT design.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1215
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 4 Cross-Laminated Timber

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data on lumber, adhesives, fabrication, and protection.

2. Submit proposed sealer for review and approval.

3. For connectors, include installation instructions.

B. Provide and coordinate three-dimensional models of the entire structural system, including connections and fasteners.

1. Erection Drawings and Installation Instructions
a. Plans and Elevations indicating sequencing of phases, crane locations and capacities and temporary bracing, as required.
b. Indicate location and unique identification mark of CLT panel and place the same mark on the panel.
c. Lifting drawings for each panel type, with all lifting inserts located, and rigging shown, with forces.

C. Permissible Design Deviations

1. Design deviations will be permitted only after the Architect/Engineer’s written approval of the manufacturer’s proposed design supported by design and drawings.

2. Design deviation shall provide an installation equivalent to the basic intent without incurring additional cost to the owner.

D. Certificates of Conformance:

1. In lieu of grade stamping lumber exposed to view provide Certificates of Conformance.

2. Certificates of Conformance should be issued by a qualified testing and inspecting agency indicating that structural cross-laminated timber or cross laminated LVL complies with the requirements in APA PRG 320-2018. If European CLT or cross laminated LVL is used, panels shall comply with the manufacturer-specific European Technical Assessment (ETA).

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: See approved list in Section 1.4.A.

B. Installer Qualifications: See approved list in Section 1.4.A.

C. All CLT shall be manufactured in a climate-controlled building which protects the lumber from moisture and UV exposure before, during, and after fabrication.

D. The manufacturer and installer shall keep a QA/QC log of items such as but not limited to:

1. Actual length, thickness and width of the panels. Length, width, thickness and diagonal measurement are to be noted.

2. Site deliveries, including verified load manifests with notes of damaged or missing material and elements.

3. Material and element install with sign off for QC on hardware/fastener installation.

4. Equipment used, such as but not limited to torque drills (with torque clutch) for screw installation through steel plates etc.

5. Any changes or modifications.

6. The inclusion of representative pictures within the log is required.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1216
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 5 Cross-Laminated Timber
E. Samples: Submit samples, if required by Architect, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Provide one sample for each panel type.

2. Sample must illustrate typical wood appearance, coating, and finish.

3. Keep sample available to view as the standard of Work for remaining fabrication.

F. Mockups: Build mockups, if required by Architect, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build one typical panel.

2. Mockup must illustrate typical wood appearance, coating, and finish.

3. Keep mockup available to view as the standard of Work for remaining fabrication.

4. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Wrap panels using plastic-coated paper covering with water-resistant seams.

B. Store panels off the ground with spacer blocks so air may circulate around all faces of panels.

C. Protect corners with blocking.

D. Keep wrapping on the panels until panels are installed, but slit underside to prevent accumulation of moisture inside the wrapping. Do not deface panels. Provide temporary sloping tarps as required to prevent accumulation of water on top of wrapped panels.

E. Weather Protection: Provide instructions outlining suggested steps to be taken during construction to provide either weather protection or a strategy for dealing with weather during the installation of the wood structure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Laminating Stock: Spruce Pine Fir #1/2 to NLGA or EN 338:2016 Structural timber strength classes unless noted otherwise.

1. Thickness: 19mm minimum, 38mm maximum.

2. Moisture Content: 12% plus or minus 3% at time of panel manufacture.

B. Moisture content: at the time of manufacturing, moisture content of lumber shall be 12% +/- 3%.

C. CLT Layup: V2 or approved equivalent
D. Appearance classification:

1. North American: Architectural where panels are exposed, Industrial where panels are hidden.

2. European CLT: Architectural.

E. Laminating Adhesive: CSA O112, clear or white or approved equivalent F. Wood Sealer: As specified in Section 099100. Sealer shall be compatible with indicated finish.

End sealer shall be effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts.

G. Fasteners: As specified on the Drawings.

H. Structural Steel Connectors: As specified in Section 051200. All steel and connectors shall be shop primed unless noted otherwise.

I. Wrapping Materials: Weatherproof, lightproof, stain-free material.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate panels to APA PRG 320 or European Technical Approvals unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

B. Service Grade: Exterior unless noted otherwise on the Drawings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1217
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 6 Cross-Laminated Timber
C. Appearance Grade:

1. “Visual” (where panels are in view in final construction):
a. Use “J” grade lumber for exposed face.
b. Shake and checks are permitted up to 24” long, none through. c. Blue stain is permitted up to a maximum of 5% unless noted otherwise. d. Heart stain is permitted.
e. Knots are permitted with NLGA Select Structural limitation. f. Pitch streaks and wane on face are not permitted.
g. Side pressure on exposed faces is required.

D. During fabrication, CLT panels shall be created square and true and shall not deviate from values indicated on shop drawings more than the dimensional tolerances indicated below:

1. Overall Squareness: The length of the two panel face diagonals measured between panel corners shall not differ by more than 1/8”.

2. Overall Straightness: Each side of panel shall not deviate from a straight line between adjacent panel edges by more than 1/16”.

3. Dimensional Tolerances:
a. Thickness: 1/16” or 2% of the panel thickness, whichever is greater. b. Width: 1/8” of the panel width.
c. Length: 1/4" of the panel length.

E. Verify dimensions and site conditions prior to fabrication.

F. Fabricate panels with 90-degree corners. Do not chamfer.

G. Shop fabricate for connections to the greatest extent possible, including cutting to length. Dress exposed surfaces as needed to remove planing and surfacing marks.

H. Placement of lifting devices onto panels in shop may be required. Supplier to coordinate with general contractor and installer.

I. Mark panels for identification during erection. Ensure marks will be concealed in final assembly for appearance grade panels. Clearly mark top surface.

J. Splices: Do not splice or join panels in locations other than those indicated without permission.

K. End-Cut Sealing: After end cutting each panel to final length, apply a double coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces.

L. Steel: Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.

M. Coating: Coat the wood with exterior coating system Sansin 2xPC-SDF (KP30) tinted over 1x KP12

2.3 CONNECTORS / FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

B. Bolts and Anchor Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and flat washers, hot dip galvanized to ASTM A153, where indicated.

C. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E488.

D. Metal Straps and Ties: Use galvanized Simpson Strong-Tie straps or approved equal, unless otherwise noted.

E. Structural Steel Connectors: As specified in Section 051200. Fabricate steel hardware and connections with joints neatly fitted, welded, and ground smooth.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1218
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 7 Cross-Laminated Timber
F. Screws: Provide as shown on Structural Drawings.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell foam, 6.4mm thick, selected from manufacturer’s standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Confirm all dimensions prior to fabrication. Coordinate with shop drawings of other trades.

B. Examine supporting construction in areas to receive panels, with installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION – GENERAL
A. Installer shall have (or shall engage assistance from an installer with) a minimum of 5 years’ experience erecting architectural timber structures and shall work to layout and erection drawings supplied by Manufacturer.

B. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep panels secure and in alignment against temporary loads during construction. Any failure to make proper and adequate provisions for stresses during erection shall be solely the responsibility of the Installer.

C. Securely attach CLT to supports as indicated on the Drawings.

D. Handle and temporarily support panels to prevent surface damage, edge damage, compression, and other effects that might interfere with indicated finish.

E. Site cutting or boring of decking, other than shown on the shop drawings, is not permitted without written consent of the Engineer.

F. Provide moisture barrier at all locations where panels abut concrete construction. Acceptable barriers include light gauge metal, asphalt-impregnated building paper, closed-cell foam gasket material, saturated felt roll roofing, or 6 mil thick polyethylene.

3.3 INSTALLATION – PREFABRICATED PANELS
A. Fit prefabricated panels accurately to specified spacing and to required levels and lines without trimming, cutting, or other modifications, unless approved in writing by the Engineer.

B. Install panels in accordance with engineered erection drawings.

C. Handle and temporarily support panels to minimize damage to visual surfaces.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Weather Protection: Provide instructions outlining suggested steps to be taken during construction to provide either weather protection or a strategy for dealing with weather during the installation of the wood structure.

3.5 REPAIRS AND FINISHING

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1219
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061719 - 8 Cross-Laminated Timber
A. Prior to final finishing, remove any stains, marks, or other damage that may have been caused by Installer during shipping or installation.

B. See approved Shop Drawings for finish requirements to exposed surfaces and edges of CLT C. Final approval by Architect will be after installation of all CLT panels. Repair work that does not conform to specification, at Architect’s request. Repair of defective work of Manufacturer/Installer is at Manufacturer’s/Installer’s expense.

3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES
A. Connections used may require tighter tolerances than specified below. Supplier and installer are responsible to coordinate during the shop drawing process.

B. Overall Squareness: For rectangular areas, the corner-to-corner diagonal measurements should not deviate from each other by more than 13mm or 0.25% of the length of the shortest side of the rectangle, whichever is greater.

C. Overall Surface Levelness (Floors and Flat Roofs): 1/4 inches in 10 feet maximum.

D. Walls Plumbness: 0.25% of wall height (1:400) maximum deviation from plumb measured at any point along the wall.

E. Elevation: Plus or minus 3/8 inches from theoretical.

F. Joints: 3/16 inch maximum gap between adjacent panels unless noted otherwise.

END OF SECTION

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1220
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 1 Glued-Laminated Timber
SECTION 06 1800

GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
The drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section covers:

1. All labor, material, equipment, permits, engineering and other services necessary for the fabrication and installation of the following in accordance with the Drawings and as specified herein:
a. Glued-Laminated (Glulam) structural units for framing members. b. Hardware, connections, brackets, and accessories.

B. Refer to Section 05 12 00 “Structural Steel Framing” for additional requirements on steel used for structural connections used for glued-laminated sections.

C. Related Sections:

1. 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing

2. 06 17 19 – Cross-Laminated Timber (CLT)

3. Division 09 – Coatings

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. General: Comply with the provisions of the latest versions of the publications listed below, including OSHA requirements except as otherwise shown or specified.

B. Building Codes:

1. As specified in the Structural Drawings.

C. Design Standards:

1. ANSI/AWC National Design Standard for Wood Construction (NDS) D. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC)/American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. AITC 110 Standard Appearance Grades for Structural Glued Laminated Timber

2. AITC 111 Recommended Practice for Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit, Storage, and Erection

3. AITC 113 Standard for Dimensions of Structural Glued Laminated Timber

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1221
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 2 Glued-Laminated Timber

4. AITC 117 Standard Specifications for Structural Glued Laminated Timber of Softwood Species

5. ANSI A190.1 Product Standard for Structural Glued Laminated Timber

6. AITC 200 Quality Control Standards for Glued Laminated Timber E. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) International:

1. ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

2. ASTM A307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile

3. ASTM A572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality

4. ASTM D3737 Standard Practice for Establishing Allowable Properties for Structural Glued Laminated Timber (Glulam)
F. APA - The Engineered Wood Association (APA):

1. APA Y110 Glued Laminated Timber Appearance Classifications for Construction Applications

2. APA T300 Glulam Connection Details

3. APA R540 Builder Tips: Proper Storage and Handling of Glulam Beams

4. APA S560 Field Notching and Drilling of Glued Laminated Timber Beams

5. APA S580 Preservative Treatment of Glued Laminated Timber

6. APA X440 Product Guide: Glulam
G. International Code Council Evaluation Services (ICC-ES): Evaluation Reports

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. “Design Professionals” – Owner’s Architect of Record (AOR) and Structural Engineer of Record (SEOR).

B. “Manufacturer” – Producer for the structural glulam units.

C. “Fabricator” – Fabricator for the structural glulam members.

D. “Installer” – Installer/erector for the structural glulam frame.

E. “Contractor” – Any of the following: General Contractor and their subcontractors, Construction Manager, Manufacturer, Fabricator, or Installer.

F. “DDE” – Delegated Design Engineer under the chosen Contractor for the timber scope.

1.5 MANUFACTURER, FABRICATOR, AND INSTALLER PERFORMANCE

REQUIREMENTS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1222
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 3 Glued-Laminated Timber
A. Below is a list of approved companies for the manufacturing, fabrication, and installation of the glulam members. Refer to the fabrication level engineering drawings (shop drawings) produced by StructureCraft.

1. Carpentry Plus

2. Cascade Joinery

3. Kinsol
B. Connection Design: Connection design has been completed and documented by StructureCraft.

No modifications to the connections are permitted.

C. Erection Procedures, Lifting Procedures and Temporary Stability of the Structural Glulam Frame: Erection engineering for the glulam frame is delegated to the DDE. The delegated design shall comply with all applicable building codes/design standards, project-specific requirements, and the performance criteria set forth in this section.

1. General: Delegate design shall include the engineering and coordination of the erection sequence, lifting and temporary bracing requirements during the construction of the glulam structure. This includes the design of temporary systems, methods, and equipment necessary to safely erect and stabilize the glulam members until the permanent structure and connections are in place.

2. Erection Engineering Scope: DDE shall be responsible for providing a comprehensive erection engineering design that addresses all aspects of lifting, positioning, and bracing of glulam components during construction. Scope shall include, but is not limited to, the following:
a. Lifting and Handling: Design of lifting and rigging systems, including the selection of lifting points, methods, and temporary supports required for safe hoisting and placement of glulam elements. This includes any specific equipment (e.g., cranes, rigging hardware) necessary for handling individual members or large assembled sections.
b. Temporary Bracing: Design of temporary bracing and stabilization systems for the glulam structure during erection. This includes the design of bracing to resist lateral forces (e.g., wind, construction loads) and prevent instability of the structure during assembly.
c. Erection Sequence: Development of a detailed erection sequence and methodology, considering the overall structural system, building geometry, and critical path for construction.
d. Temporary Connections and Supports: Design of temporary connections, supports, and anchorages required during erection, ensuring they provide adequate strength and stability until permanent connections are installed.
e. Coordination with Permanent Systems: Design of temporary bracing and lifting systems shall be coordinated with the permanent structural design to ensure that loads and forces from the temporary systems are properly accounted for and do not affect the integrity of the permanent structure.

3. Performance Criteria: Erection engineering design shall meet the following performance criteria:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1223
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 4 Glued-Laminated Timber
a. Safety: All systems shall be designed to ensure the safety of workers during the erection process. This includes considerations for stability, load transfer, and temporary member restraint.
b. Load Resistance: Temporary bracing and lifting systems shall be capable of resisting the forces during and induced by construction activities, including wind, seismic events (if applicable), and other temporary loads.
c. Constructability: Design shall consider ease of installation, minimize the number of components required for temporary systems, and avoid conflicts with other construction activities or trades.
d. Minimization of Damage: Temporary systems shall be designed to minimize any potential damage to glulam members during the erection process, including the prevention of over-stressing or distortion of the material.

D. Alternate Sizes and Species: Member sizes shown on the Structural Drawings are based on species indicated. At the Contractor’s option, alternate member species at the same dimensions shown on the drawings are permitted, where accepted by the Design Professionals, if shown to be structurally equivalent by the DDE.

E. Design Deviations: Design deviations will be permitted only after acceptance in writing by the Design Professionals.

F. Calculations: DDE calculations shall be performed and sealed by a registered professional engineer licensed in the State of California with at least 5 years of experience in gluedlaminated timber design.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following data and drawings for review and acceptance before fabrication and execution in accordance with Section 01 33 00, "Submittal Procedures." B. Product Data: For each product indicated.

1. Glulam Certificates of Conformance: In lieu of grade stamping exposed to view, submit manufacturer’s certificate certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

2. Fastener data sheets that meet or exceed specified requirements.

3. See 05 12 00 for submittal guidelines for submittal requirements of associated steel connection elements.

C. Drawings and Calculations: Submit the following for review prior to commencing any fabrication.

1. General
a. Each Erection Drawing shall be dated and identified with a unique drawing number.

Resubmitted drawings shall be given a new revision number with each resubmission, and all changes/additions/deletions from the previous submission shall be clearly and individually identified. Resubmissions received without revision numbers or identification of changes/additions/deletions will be returned unreviewed. b. Erection Drawings shall contain complete dimensional and geometric information, based on established dimensions shown on Contract Document, and shall not be scaled from Contract Documents.
c. All drawings shall be sealed by the DDE.
d. SEOR Submittal Reviews:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1224
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 5 Glued-Laminated Timber
1) Review of Erection Drawings for general conformance with the design intent of the work and with the information given in the Contract Documents only and will not in any way relieve the Contractor or the DDE from:
a) Responsibility for the proper fitting of construction work in strict conformance with the contract requirements.
b) The necessity of furnishing material and workmanship required by Contract Documents which may not be indicated on the Shop and Erection Drawings.
c) Conforming to the Contract Documents.
d) Coordination with other trades/subcontractors.
e) Control or charge of construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, for safety precautions and programs in connection with the work.

2. Erection Drawings (including Field Work Drawings) and Installation Procedure a. Submit a timber structure Installation Procedure, prepared by the DDE. Procedure shall describe the methods of installation and planned sequence of erection for the timber structure.
b. Plans and elevations indicating sequencing of installation, crane locations and capacities, and temporary bracing, as required.
c. Lifting drawings for each member type, with all lifting inserts/devices located, and rigging shown with forces.
d. Field connections not specifically shown on Shop Drawings shall be shown on Erection Drawings. Indicate type, size, and length of screws, bolts, nails and other fasteners, and include any special installation requirements. Indicate any field weld size, type, length and location.

3. Delegated Design Calculations
a. Submit calculations for all erection engineering by the DDE. Calculations shall include lifting, temporary stability, and analysis of glulam members for stresses imposed during all stages of installation.
b. Calculations shall be submitted with the first drawing submittal and shall be crossreferenced with all drawing submittals. c. All calculations shall be sealed by the DDE.

4. Preconstruction Surveys: Execute and submit for record a comprehensive survey of any existing construction that supports and/or interfaces with glulam elements, including but not limited to walls, pockets, embedded plates, anchor rods and base plates. Include plan location positions relative to building gridlines. Include elevations of bearing surfaces and tops of anchor rods relative to building datum elevations. Immediately notify the Design Professionals and DDE of elements that are not within tolerance.

5. As-Built Surveys: Execute and submit for record a comprehensive survey of the timber structure at each level adequate to assess if the structure has been built within the tolerances specified in the Contract Documents. Each certified survey, performed by a professional surveyor employed by the Contractor, shall be submitted to the Contractor’s DDE for their approval before proceeding to the next stage of installation. If deviations from the tolerances are discovered, the Contractor shall present corrective measures to the Design Professionals within 48 hours of completion of that stage of installation. Upon completion of timber installation, submit the complete package of timber surveys for record to the Design Professionals and the Owner.

D. Submittals related to steel connections

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1225
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 6 Glued-Laminated Timber

1. Welding Procedure Specification (WPS): Submit for record written welding procedures for all AWS D1.1 prequalified joints, and qualification procedures for all joints not prequalified by Section 3 of AWS D1.1.

2. Welder Certification: Submit for record certification that welders have passed qualification tests in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Quality Control Procedures: Submit Fabricator’s Quality Control Procedures prior to commencing any fabrication.

F. Samples: To be coordinated with Architect.

G. Mockups: To be coordinated with Architect.

H. Substitution Requests

1. Requests for any departure from Contract Documents must be submitted in writing by the Contractor and accepted in writing by the Design Professionals, prior to receipt of submittals.

2. Compensation for Additional Services: Should additional work by Design Professionals such as design, documentation, meetings and/or site visits be required which are necessitated for the review and/or incorporation of the Contractor-requested substitution, including indirect effects on other portions of the work, the Contractor is responsible for paying for additional work performed by the Design Professionals at the standard billing rates plus out-of-pocket expenses incurred at cost + 10%. Additional costs for testing and inspection by the Owner shall also be compensated by the Contractor.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Fabricator, Installer, and DDE.

B. Method Statements

1. Weather and Moisture Protection Method Statement: Submit a written statement of the means and methods employed to monitor and manage the effects of exterior exposure on the glulam during construction.

2. Installation Method Statement: Submit a written statement of the means and methods employed for the installation and temporary support of glulam frame during construction. a. Where concealed connections of temporary bracing are not possible, include proposed repair procedures for glulam members after temporary connections are removed.

C. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): Provide a third party verified environmental product declaration (EDP) for all glulam timber, as required. All global warming potential (GWP) information contained in the EPD shall be in the form of kg CO2e.

D. LEED submittals, as required.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1226
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 7 Glued-Laminated Timber
A. General: Quality Control (QC) is the responsibility of the Contractor. Quality Assurance (QA) shall be provided by others when required by the authority having jurisdiction, applicable building code, purchaser, Owner, or Engineer of Record. Refer to Section 01 45 00, "Structural Testing, Inspection, and Quality Assurance," for inspection requirements performed by Owner’s Testing Agency.

B. Materials:

1. Provide factory-glued structural units produced by an AITC- or APA-licensed manufacturer.
b. Factory mark each piece of structural glulam timber with AITC Quality Mark or APA-EWS trademark. Place marks on surfaces that will not be exposed to view in the completed work.

2. Quality Standard: Comply with ANSI A190.1.

1.7 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETINGS
A. Connection Design and Detailing Conference: At least 30 working days prior to starting fabrication, the Contractor shall hold a meeting to verify all connection design assumptions and shop drawing preparation/procedures for the glulam. The Contractor shall prepare an agenda and include key representatives from the General Contractor, Timber Subcontractor, DDE, AOR, Special Inspector and SEOR. The agenda shall be distributed at least 5 working days prior to the scheduled meeting.

B. Erection Conference: At least 30 working days prior to commencing timber installation, the Contractor shall hold a meeting to review the detailed requirements of the timber glulam installation. The Contractor shall prepare an agenda and include key representatives from the General Contractor, Timber Subcontractor, DDE, Surveyor, Special Inspector, Envelope Subcontractor and SEOR. The agenda shall be distributed at least 5 working days prior to the scheduled meeting.

1.8 TEMPORARY SUPPORT OF STRUCTURAL FRAME
A. The structure as shown on the Contract Documents is designed to withstand the design loads only when all structural elements are installed and fully connected. The Contractor shall be responsible for the analysis of all components and assemblies for stresses and displacements that may be imposed by fabrication, shipping, handling, installation, temporary conditions, construction loads, etc. The analysis of such shall be performed by the DDE.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with AITC 111.

B. Wrap glulam members during delivery, storage and handling with weatherproof, lightproof, stain-free covering. Protect glulam members to minimize damage.

C. Support glulam members during shipment on non-staining material in same position as during storage.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1227
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 8 Glued-Laminated Timber
D. Take actions to prevent staining, cracking, distortion, warping or other physical damage to glulam members.

1. Handle and transport members in a position consistent with their shape and design to avoid excessive stresses that could cause cracking or damage. Protect corners with wood blocking.

2. Store glulam members on level, well-drained area off the ground, supported on dunnage or skids and separated with stripping, to allow ventilation and ensure air may circulate around all faces of each member.

3. Cut holes or slits in underside of protective wrap to allow sufficient ventilation and to avoid accumulation of condensation or moisture. Take care to not deface members during cutting.

E. Provide moisture barrier at all locations where glulam members abut concrete or masonry construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
A. General: Provide glued-laminated timber conforming to ANSI A119.1 and certified by APAEWS, AITC, or approved equivalent.

B. Moisture Content: At the time of fabrication, moisture content of glulam shall be 12% +/- 3%.

C. Strength Grades: As defined on the Structural Drawings.

D. Appearance Classification: Architectural (as defined in ANSI A119.1), unless noted otherwise on the Contract Documents. Final Appearance Classification to be approved by Architect by sample submission.

E. Cambers: As shown on the Structural Drawings. Camber may be adjusted to meet manufacturer standards, but must be within camber tolerance per ANSI A190.1.

F. Coating: Coat the wood with exterior coating system Sansin 2xPC-SDF (KP30) tinted over 1x KP12

2.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Steel Connectors, Plates, and Brackets: ASTM A572 or ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise on the Structural Drawings or by the DDE; weldable quality, metal shapes as required for joining members together and to supports.

1. Exterior exposed components: Hot-dip galvanize or provide high-performance coating as specified by Architect.

2. Interior components: Powder coat.

3. Ensure no nicks or coating damage to allow rusting or leaching onto the timber structure.

B. Threaded Bolts and Related Hardware: Conform to provisions of ASTM A307, Grade A or B, structural quality steel, hex head bolts, and nuts, unless noted otherwise on the Structural Drawings or by the DDE. Hot-dip galvanize where specified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1228
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 9 Glued-Laminated Timber
C. Bearing Plate Threaded Anchors and Studs: ASTM A307, Grade C, structural quality steel, unless noted otherwise on the Structural Drawings or by the DDE. Hot-dip galvanize where specified.

D. Metal Connectors: Simpson Strong-Tie or approved equivalent. Types indicated on drawings with minimum G-90 zinc coating where specified.

E. Fasteners and Screws: Provide fasteners as indicated on the Structural Drawings or by the DDE. Supply with coatings suitable for the project’s service class (as defined in EN 1995-1-1 “Eurocode 5: Design of Timber Structures” Section 2.3.1.3).

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Maximize shop fabrication and pre-assembly of glulam members and connections.

B. End Cut Sealing: Immediately after cutting each member to final length, apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces.

C. Finish Sealer Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-cut sealing, apply a finish sealer coat as specified.

2.4 FINISH
A. Architectural Glulam Units: Standard smooth-planed mill-finish, free of glue squeeze-out and surface glue.

B. Finish Sealer Coat: Minimum sealer coat shall be a penetrating and breathable sealer that is transparent, colorless, and provides adequate protection against mositure and UV exposure during the duration of construction. Sealer shall meet additional requirements on the Contract Documents. Sealer shall be submitted to and approved by the Architect by sample.

C. Metal Connectors and Exposed Fasteners: See “CONNECTIONS.” PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

1. Perform a Preconstruction Survey as outlined previously (see “ACTION SUBMITTALS”).

2. Examine substrates in areas supporting and/or interfacing with glulam members for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of glulam.

B. Proceed with installation of glulam only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1229
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
StructureCraft 75% Submittal / Building Permit 061800 - 10 Glued-Laminated Timber
A. General:

1. Erect glulam frame true and plumb and with uniform, close-fitting joints. Accurately fit members together and anchor as required for rigid and permanent installation.

2. Provide temporary bracing and anchorage as required to hold members in place until permanently secured. Provide temporary support as required to maintain lines and levels until permanent support members are in place.

B. Modifications and Field Adjustments: Any modifications or adjustments to delegated design connections during construction shall be coordinated with and approved by the DDE. Once approved, documentation shall be submitted to the Design Professionals for acceptance prior to performing the work.

C. Cutting: Avoid cutting following fabrication. Field cutting, notching and boring of glulam members is not allowed unless approved by SEOR. Where field cutting is required, follow APA S560.

D. Grinding and Welding: No grinding or welding of metal shall take place near timber components without appropriate protective measures taken to ensure no damage. Protective measures protect timber from burn marks and staining from rusting filings.

E. Moisture Content:

1. At the time of installation, moisture content shall remain stable and shall at no point rise above 19%.

2. Timber elements with moisture content exceeding 19% at time of installation shall be reported to the DDE and Design Professionals. An appropriate remedy shall be developed and accepted by the Design Professionals.

F. Tolerance: Conform to tolerances on the Contract Documents and all applicable standards.

G. Interfaces with Concrete and Masonry: Provide moisture barrier at all locations where glulam members abut concrete or masonry construction.

H. Building Conditioning: Provide gradual heating and dehumidification of enclosed building to maintain slow changes of moisture content in glulam.

END OF SECTION 06 18 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1230
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 064013 - 1
Landscape Woodwork
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
SECTION 064013 – EXTERIOR WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Section.

B. Section 034801 SITE PRECAST CONCRETE (custom bench)
C. Section 057210 LANDSCAPE METAL FABRICATIONS (custom bench) D. Section 099623 ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING (custom bench)

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work Included: All labor, materials and equipment necessary to complete the installation of carpentry work shown on the Landscape Drawings including the following:

1. Custom Bench

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS
A. The following references and standards are hereby made a part of this Section and wood construction material and installation shall conform to the applicable requirements therein except as otherwise specified herein or shown on the Drawings.

B. Lumber grading rules and wood species: Conform to Product Standard PS 20-70 AND "Standard Grading and Dressing Rules No. 16" of the West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

C. Hardwood: FSC certified.

D. Plywood: Conform to requirements of Product Standard PS 1-74 and be manufactured by members of the American Plywood Association (APA)
E. Conform to applicable requirements of local building code and Uniform Building Code, Chapter 25, latest edition, unless otherwise noted.

F. Pressure Treated Wood: Conform to American Wood Preservers Association Standards (AWPA).

G. Manual of Millwork, Woodwork Institute of California, latest edition. (WIC) H. Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards (AWI).

I. American Softwood Lumber Standard.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1231
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 064013 - 2
Landscape Woodwork
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Samples: Submit 12" long samples of all lumber and finishes for approval prior to delivery to the site.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of the following:

1. Custom Wood Bench Seat and Backrest.
a. Provide complete shop drawings indicating material(s) of structural members, locations of structural members, attachments to precast concrete base, landscape metalwork, joint details, etc.
b. Provide structural engineering calculations and drawings prepared by a Professional Engineer in the State of California.

C. Wood preservative treatment certification, in writing, by the plant(s) performing the wood preservative treatment(s) specified herein will be required. Two copies of the certification shall be delivered to the Architect prior to each shipment of lumber, timber, or piles. Certification shall indicate that treatment applied complies with the criteria and physical requirements for ACQ (alkaline copper quaternary) preservative-treated wood products as specified herein.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber may be rejected by the Landscape Architect, whether or not it has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper cutting and fitting.

B. Finished Carpentry shall conform with applicable sections of the manual for millwork.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Immediately upon delivery to project, place materials in staging area and protect from weather.

B. Protect all lumber stored on site from rain and excessive sun, and stack in such fashion as to prevent twisting and warping and avoid contact with the ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER
A. Wood Species: Kebony, or approved equal.

1. FSC Certified.

B. Grading: Each piece of lumber for use in structural framing shall be graded and marked with the grade and trademark of a lumber grading organization approved by the Landscape Architect, except that a certificate of grade furnished by such organization may be accepted in lieu of grade and trademarks when approved by the Landscape Architect.

C. Miscellaneous:

1. All wood species shall be FSC Certified.

2. All exposed wood shall be acetylated and thermal modified.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1232
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 064013 - 3
Landscape Woodwork
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1

2.2 ROUGH HARDWARE
A. Furnish all nails, spikes, bolts, screws, and framing connectors of standard manufacture required to complete the Work.

B. Hot-dip galvanize all items.

C. Joist Hangers and Framing Connectors: Simpson or equal, complete with required fasteners.

D. Mild Steel: ASTM A-283.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53.

F. Zinc Coated Sheet Steel: ASTM A-526, A-525, G90.

G. Bolts and nuts: ASTM A-307-78, Grade A.

H. Lag Bolts: Fed. Spec. FF-B-561.

I. Nails: Fed. Spec. FF-N-101, common unless otherwise noted or specified.

J. Explosive Driven Fasteners: Driv-It, Omark, Ramset, Remington, or approved equal, each use and fastener type subject to prior approval by Architect.

K. Stainless Steel Screws: 316 for use with wood.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Construction shall be in accordance with minimum requirements of the Uniform Building Code, latest edition. Contractor shall furnish and install adequate shoring, bracing, and formwork, for protection of life and property during construction, and is solely responsible for jobsite safety.

3.2 INSPECTION
A. Examine the substrate under which carpentry work is to be installed. Notify the Landscape Architect, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install work in accord with approved shop drawings and referenced AWI Standards.

B. All carpentry work shall be carried out in a skillful manner. Horizontal and vertical members shall be plumb and true to line and grade. All joints shall be tight and accurately fitted. Shims will not be allowed unless specifically called for on the plans. All wood surfaces shall be sanded where necessary to remove undesirable rough edges. All knot holes, pitch pockets, or sappy portions shall be sealed with an approved resin sealer under natural finishes.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1233
WRT 100% Submittal / Bid Set 064013 - 4
Landscape Woodwork
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1
C. Metal work shall be fabricated to the details shown, shall have all brackets necessary for the attachment of woodwork.

D. Select individual pieces of lumber so that knots and obvious minor defects will not interfere with placing of bolts, proper nailing, or making of proper connections. In exposed locations, select for appearance satisfactory to the Landscape Architect.

E. Framing shall be closely fitted, accurately set in plumb planes to required lines and levels and rigidly secured in place. Beams shall be set with crowned edge up; bottom edges shall be free from pronounced defects. Special framing or construction, not explicitly shown or specified, shall be provided as directed by the Landscape Architect to complete work in the best workmanlike manner.

F. Provide all bolting, nailing and other fastenings required to complete the wood construction shown on the drawings.

G. Bolt holes shall be 1/32-inch to 1/16-inch larger than bolts, and shall be accurately located to permit proper alignment of members and easy driving of bolts. A standard cut washer, or the equivalent thereof, shall be installed between each bolt head and nut and wood. Bolts shall be taken up snug and shall be retightened at the latest practicable time during the construction work.

1. Counter-sink all bolt heads and nuts.

2. Vandal-proof all bolting and other connections by burring threads.

H. Holes, cuts, etc., made in lumber and posts, after wood preservative treatment, shall be heavily coated with a concentrated solution of the wood preservative used.

I. Nailing shall be done in a workmanlike manner, care being exercised to avoid splitting wood.

All nailing clips, hangers, and the like shall receive full number of nails of proper size as furnished with clips or recommended in manufacturer's printed instructions.

J. Edges shall be rounded and smoothed.

K. Construct to WIC specifications for Custom Work.

L. Plug all holes so they are not visible.

M. Surfaces shall be smooth to the touch without splintering.

END OF SECTION 064013

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1234
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07 13 00
SECTION 07 13 00 – PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1 — GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work of this Section includes, but is not limited to:

1. Blindside pre-applied sheet membrane waterproofing that forms an adhesive and mechanical bond to poured concrete for the following applications:
i. Horizontal Applications: Membrane applied on prepared subbase prior to placement of concrete slabsand mat slabs.
ii. Vertical Applications: Membrane applied against formwork, or soil retention system prior to placement of concrete foundation walls. iii. Waterstops for sealing concrete construction joints, pipe penetrations, and knock-outs.

B. Related Sections: Refer to the following specification sections for coordination:

1. Section 03 10 00 - Concrete Formwork

2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing

3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete
C. Referenced Standards: Comply with the requirements of the following standards published by ASTM International to the extent referenced in this section.

1. ASTM C 836 Standard Specification for High Solids Content, Cold Liquid-Applied Elastomeric Waterproofing Membrane for Use with Separate Wearing Course

2. ASTM D412 Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension

3. ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics

4. ASTM D 903 Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds

5. ASTM D 1876 Standard Test Method for Peel Resistance of Adhesives (T-Peel Test)

6. ASTM D1970 Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection

7. ASTM D3767 Standard Practice for Rubber - Measurement of Dimensions

8. ASTM D5385 Standard Test Method for Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance of Waterproofing Membranes

9. ASTM E96 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials

10. ASTM E 154 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Manufacturer's Product Data, installation instructions for waterproofing membrane system, and representative membrane samples for approval.

B. LEED Submittals – Provide LEED submittal information as required.

C. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer to provide shop drawings of the entire sub-grade waterproofing system showing locations and extent of all waterproofing materials, waterstops, and accessories including details of substrate joints, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, integration with air barrier system, and other termination conditions.

D. Mock-up Panels: Mock-up panels as specified herein shall be constructed by the Contractor at locations selected by the Architect, to test all products specified in this Section and arrive at acceptable methods of installation.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1235
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07 13 00

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Sheet membrane waterproofing system manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified and demonstrate a minimum of fifteen (15) years continuous, successful experience in production of waterproofing membranes.

B. Installer Qualifications: Sheet membrane waterproofing system installation shall be performed by one Contractor, approved by the waterproofing manufacturer, and shall have at least three (3) years of experience in work of the type required by this section.

C. Manufacturer Technical Representatives: Membrane manufacturer shall provide trained direct company personnel to attend necessary job meetings, perform periodic inspections as necessary, and conduct a final inspection upon successful completion of the installation.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions, to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work, and to review special details.

E. Give a minimum of five (5) days’ notice to the owner and manufacturer prior to commencing any work and notify both parties on a daily basis of any change in work schedule.

F. Contractor shall attend necessary job meetings and furnish competent and full-time supervision, experienced mechanics, all materials, tools, and equipment necessary to complete, in an acceptable manner, the membrane installation in accordance with this specification.

G. Materials: Obtain primary sheet membrane waterproofing and all joint sealing and waterstop materials of each type required from a single manufacturer. Manufacturer to provide waterproofing shop drawings.

H. Backup Preparation: The Contractor shall prepare the backup surfaces to accept the approved waterproofing system in the manner necessary to comply with all requirements of the membrane manufacturer and architect. Backup preparation shall be guided by the following:

I. Mock-up areas shall be used to determine required methods and tools to obtain degree of backup preparation required by the membrane manufacturer. Prepare and clean a three (3) foot by three (3) foot areas of each substrate material type.

J. Schedule Coordination: Schedule work such that the membrane will not be left exposed to jobsite conditions for longer than that recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer or manufacturer’s representative to be on site during waterproofing installation.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Del Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original and unopened labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer’s instructions. Protect from damage from weather, excessive temperature, and construction operations. Remove and dispose of damaged material in accordance with applicable regulations.

1.5 CODE REQUIREMENTS
A. Work shall be performed in accordance with the more stringent requirements of these specifications, the Local Building Code, OSHA, or other governmental authorities including Federal, State, and Local, having jurisdiction.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Perform work only when weather conditions as well as ambient and substrate temperatures are within the limits established by the manufacturer of the sheet membrane waterproofing system.

Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, or mist.

B. Proceed with installation only when the substrate construction and preparation work is complete and is suitable to support sheet membrane waterproofing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1236
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07 13 00
PART 2 — PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Sika St. Louis, 3400 Tree Court Industrial Boulevard, St. Louis, MO 63122; Phone: 800-325- 9504; Fax: 800-551-5145; Email: [email protected]; usa.sika.com B. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain primary sheet membrane waterproofing and all joint sealing and waterstop materials of each type required from a single manufacturer.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Basis of Design: Pre-applied and Post-Applied Integrally Bonded Sheet Waterproofing Membrane: SikaProof® A+ by Sika Corporation, a flexible sheet membrane consisting of a flexible polyolefin membrane and a hybrid bonding layer with a cement modified polymer. The membrane shall form a continuous and permanent dual bond (mechanical and adhesive) to poured concrete or existing concrete to prevent lateral water migration between the membrane and structural concrete

1. Pre-Applied Applications:
i. Horizontal Applications (Underslab):

1. Sika; SikaProof® A+12
ii. Vertical Applications (Blindside)

1. Sika; SikaProof® A+12

2. Post-Applied Applications:
i. Horizontal Applications (Post Applied)

1. Sika; SikaProof® A+12 with SikaProof® Adhesive-22
ii. Vertical Applications (Post Applied on walls)
B. Provide membrane with the following physical properties:

Property Test Method Result
Color Yellow
Thickness (nominal) ASTM D 3767 1.70mm (0.07in.)
Lateral Water Migration
Resistance
ASTM D 5385 modified Pass at 71m (231 ft.) of hydrostatic head pressure head pressure
Resistance to Hydrostatic Head ASTM D 5385 modified 71m (231 ft.) min.

Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970 Pass at -29oC (-20oF) Tensile Strength1 ASTM D 412 830 psi (5.7 MPa) min.

Elongation1 ASTM D 412 1400% min.

Crack Cycling ASTM C 836 Pass at -26oC (-15oF)
Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 20 lbs/in. min.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1237
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07 13 00

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. SikaProof® Tape A+: Self-Adhesive tape for pre-applied internal jointing, detailing, and transitions.

B. SikaProof® ExTape-150: Self-Adhesive tape for post-applied SikaProof® A+ membrane seams C. SikaProof® Adhesive-22: Cementitious adhesive for application of SikaProof® A+ membrane to concrete
D. Sika Drainage Mat 420: Consists of a polypropylene dimpled drainage core bonded with a nonwoven geocomposite fabric on the top side, and a membrane protective film bonded to the bottom side.

E. Leakmaster LVZ: Single Component moisture-cure water-swelling sealant used for detailing and penetrations
F. Waterstop: Sika Greenstreak waterstops as required by Architects Waterproofing Schedule or by Manufacturer Technical Representatives.

G. SikaSwell S-2: specially formulated, high-performance, swellable, one-component, polyurethanebased waterstop for use in all kinds of construction joints. Swelling rubber creates a compression seal within joint, blocking the passage of water.

H. SikaHyflex-407 EverFlash Universal: a one component, hybrid technology, non-sag, flexible, flashing and weather barrier sealant designed for primerless adhesion to the most challenging substrates found in the building envelope.

I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Accessories specified or acceptable to manufacturer of pre-applied waterproofing membrane system.

PART 3 — EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. The Installer shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this work is to be performed and notify the Contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Membrane Placement: Thickness of the sub-grade membrane shall be determined by the following factors and approved by the membrane manufacturer’s technical representative and the architect.

1. SikaProof® A+ 12: Use on all horizontal surfaces and where rebar cages are placed next to vertical surfaces. Run SikaProof® A+ 12 up vertical wall to a height above the rebar concentration and marry to the SikaProof® A+ 12 membrane. Use for post-applied horizontal applications with SikaProof® Adhesive-22

2. SikaProof® A+12: Use on all vertical surfaces where membrane will be pre-applied or for post applied applications with SikaProof® Adhesive-22.

3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
A. Pre-Applied Applications

1. The substrate shall be of sufficient stability to prevent movement during the concrete placement. Substrates must be regular and smooth with no gaps or voids larger than 0.5 in.

Acceptable substrates include concrete, permanent or removable formwork, plywood, fleece, rigid protection board, or drainage composite.

Lap Peel Adhesion ASTM D 1876 30 lbs/in. min.

Permeance ASTM E 96 Method B 3.45ng/Pa x s x m2 (0.06 perms) Puncture Resistance ASTM E 154 200 lbs (670 N) min.

Radon Permeability (SPA-12) Certificate E-214/2011 (5.3 +/- 0.7) x 10-12 m2/s

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1238
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07 13 00

2. Horizontal Surfaces: The substrate must be free of loose aggregate and sharp protrusions.

Avoid curved or rounded substrates. When installing over crushed stone or earth, ensure substrate is well compacted to prevent displacement of the substrate due to traffic or concrete placement. Substrate may be damp but standing water must be removed.

3. Vertical Surfaces: Use a suitable substrate such as permanent or temporary formwork, plywood, rigid protection board, or drainage composite to provide membrane support.

B. Post-Applied Applications

1. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing.

C. Cast In Place Concrete Substrates:

1. Concrete must be cured for minimum 48 hours

2. Fill form tie rod holes with concrete and finish flush with surrounding surface.

3. Repair bug holes over 0.5 in in length and 0.25 in depth and finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

4. Remove scaling to sound, unaffected concrete and repair exposed area

5. Grind irregular construction joints to suitable flush surface

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Strictly comply with installation instructions in manufacturer’s published literature, including but not limited to the following:

B. Horizontal Pre-Applied Applications:

1. Install a separation/protection or leveling layer based on existing jobsite conditions.

2. Form the corners with the same SikaProof® A+12 sheet adhering internally with SikaProof® Tape-A+.

3. Install the SikaProof® A+ membrane grey side up, adhering the joints with the SikaProof® Tape A+ or the SikaProof® Sandwich Tape.

4. Accurately position succeeding sheets to overlap the previous sheet by a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.).

5. Apply SikaProof® Tape A+ or SikaProof® Sandwich Tape at overlap of sheets. Roll with a hand roller to ensure a continuous bond is achieved.

6. Install detail areas, such as pipe penetrations, pits, connections, expansion joints, and any other special details using the appropriate accessory products and in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Vertical Pre-Applied Applications:

1. Install leveling layer or protection based on existing jobsite conditions.

2. Mechanically fasten the membrane using fasteners appropriate to the substrate with the grey side facing towards the concrete placement. The membrane may be installed in either horizontal or vertical orientation in any convenient length.

3. Accurately position succeeding sheets to overlap by a minimum of 50mm (2 in.).

4. Apply SikaProof® Tape A+ at overlap of sheets. Roll with hand roller to ensure a continuous bond is achieved.

D. Dual Vertical Formwork Pre-Applied Applications:

1. Mechanically fasten the membrane using fasteners appropriate to the substrate with the grey side facing towards the concrete placement. The membrane may be installed in either

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1239
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set PRE-POST-APPLIED SHEET

MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING
07 13 00
horizontal or vertical orientation in any convenient length.

2. Accurately position succeeding sheets to overlap by a minimum of 50mm (2 in.). Ensure the underside of the succeeding sheet is clean, dry, and free from contamination before removing the protective release liner.

3. Apply SikaProof® Sandwich Tape between overlapping sheets and roll with hand roller to ensure a continuous bond is achieved.

4. After removing the formwork penetrations, such as form ties, any membrane damage and construction joints can be sealed on the external side of the membrane with SikaProof® Patch-200 or the Sika Dilatec system.

5. Protect membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s published literature prior to backfilling operations.

E. Post Applied Applications (Vertical and Horizontal)

1. Apply SikaProof® Adhesive-22 at rate recommended by manufacturer using a 1/4in x 3/16in V-notch trowel for vertical and horizontal.

2. Apply membrane directly into adhesive bed during workability time of adhesive.

3. Tape Seams after adhesive has cured and apply protection board and related materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION 07 13 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1240
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT 07 13 90 - 1
SECTION 07 13 90 – ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 — GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies a self-adhering sheet membrane used as underlayment for sloped standing seam metal roofs and as a W.R.B under parapet coping.

B. Related Sections: Refer to the following specification sections for coordination:

1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 06 16 43 – Gypsum Sheathing.

3. Section 07 41 13 - Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels.

C. Referenced Standards: Comply with the requirements of the following standards published by ASTM International to the extent referenced in this section.

1. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers - Tension.

2. ASTM D461 - Standard Test Methods for Felt.

3. ASTM D 903 - Standard Test Method for Peel or Stripping Strength of Adhesive Bonds.

4. ASTM D1970 - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

5. ASTM D3767 - Standard Practice for Rubber—Measurement of Dimensions.

6. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

7. ASTM G90 – EMMAqua test.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and applicable codes at the location of the project.

B. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years experience producing roofing underlayment.

C. Installer: Minimum 2 years experience with installation of similar underlayment.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials and products in unopened factory labeled packages. Protect from damage.

B. Cover materials and store in dry condition between temperatures of 40 and 90 degrees F (5 and 32 degrees C). Use within one year of date of manufacture. Do not store at elevated temperatures as that will reduce the shelf life of the product.

PART 2 — PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER
A. Manufacturer: AEP Span, 2110 Enterprise Blvd. W. Sacramento, CA 95691, Toll Free

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1241
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT 07 13 90 - 2
800.733.495, www.aepspan.com or Approved Equal.

B. Manufacturer: GCP Applied Technologies, Inc, 62 Whittemore Avenue, Cambridge, MA 02140, Toll Free 866-333-3726, www.gcpat.com or Approved Equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Roof Underlayment: Provide AEP Span Underlayment HT by AEP Span, or Equal with the following characteristics:

1. Material: High Tensile strength, SBS modified rubberized asphalt underlayment.

Cold applied, self-adhering membrane composed of a high strength polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of butyl rubber adhesive and interwound with a disposable release sheet. An embossed, slip resistant surface is provided on the polyethylene.

2. Color: Gray-black.

3. Membrane Thickness: 40 mil (0.76 mm) ASTM D3767 method A.

4. Tensile strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1720 kN/m2) ASTM D412 (Die C modified).

5. Elongation, Membrane: 250% ASTM D412 (Die C modified).

6. Low Temperature Flexibility: -45F ASTM D1970.

7. Adhesion to Plywood: 35 lbs/ft width ASTM D1970.

8. Permeance (max): 0.02 Perms ASTM D1970.

9. Material Weight Installed (max): 0.22 lb/ft2 (1.1 kg/m2) ASTM D461.

10. Service Temperature: 250 degrees F per ASTM D1204

11. Primer: CCW-702, CCW-702WB, CAV-GRIP, CCW-AWP.

12. Code and Standards Compliance: AEP Span underlayment HT meets the following requirements:
a. ICC ESR-1677 approval according to AC-48 Acceptance Criteria for Self-Adhered underlayments used as Ice Barriers
b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. R13399 Class A fire classification under fiberglass shingles and Class C under organic felt shingles.
c. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Classified Sheathing Material Fire Resistance Classification Design Numbers P225, P227, P230, P237, P259, P508, P510, P512, P514, P701, P711, P717, P722, P723, P732, P734, P742, P824.

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane Parapet Coping Underlayment: Provide Grace Ultra by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc or Equal with the following characteristics:

1. Material: Cold applied, self-adhering membrane composed of a high strength polyethylene film coated on one side with a layer of butyl rubber adhesive and interwound with a disposable release sheet. An embossed, slip resistant surface is provided on the polyethylene.

2. Color: Gray-black.

3. Membrane Thickness: 30 mil (0.76 mm) ASTM D3767 method A.

4. Tensile strength, Membrane: 250 psi (1720 kN/m2) ASTM D412 (Die C modified).

5. Elongation, Membrane: 250% ASTM D412 (Die C modified).

6. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected @ -20°F (-29°C) ASTM D1970.

7. Adhesion to Plywood: 3.0 lbs/in width (525 N/m) ASTM D903.

8. Permeance (max): 0.05 Perms (2.9 ng/m2s Pa) ASTM E96.

9. Material Weight Installed (max): 0.22 lb/ft2 (1.1 kg/m2) ASTM D461.

10. Service Temperature: 300 degrees F (148.8 degrees C) per ASTM D1204

11. Primer: Water-based Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer by GCP Applied Technologies, Inc.

12. Code and Standards Compliance: Ultra meets the following requirements:
a. ICC ESR-1677 approval according to AC-48 Acceptance Criteria for Self-Adhered underlayments used as Ice Barriers
b. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. R13399 Class A fire classification under fiberglass

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1242
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT 07 13 90 - 3
shingles and Class C under organic felt shingles.
c. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Classified Sheathing Material Fire Resistance Classification Design Numbers P225, P227, P230, P237, P259, P508, P510, P512, P514, P701, P711, P717, P722, P723, P732, P734, P742, P824.

PART 3 — EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to start of installation, inspect existing conditions to ensure surfaces are suitable for installation of roofing underlayment. Verify flashing has been installed. Starting work indicates installers acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Installation: Install roofing underlayment on sloped surfaces at locations indicated on the Drawings, but not less than at hips, ridges, eaves, valleys, sidewalls and chimneys, and surfaces over interior space within 36 inches (914 mm) from the inside face of the exterior wall.

Strictly comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions including but not limited to the following:

1. Schedule installation such that underlayment is covered by roofing within the published exposure limit of the underlayment.

2. Do not install underlayment on wet or frozen substrates.

3. Install when surface temperature of substrate is a minimum of 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) and rising.

4. Remove dust, dirt, loose materials and protrusions from deck surface.

5. Install membrane on clean, dry, continuous structural deck. Fill voids and damaged or unsupported areas prior to installation.

6. Prime gypsum board and other porous or dusty surfaces as required to promote initial adhesion. Priming is not required for clean, dry wood, metal or most polyisocyanurate surfaces (poly iso paper facer does require priming).

7. Install membrane such that all laps shed water. Work from the low point to the high point of the roof at all times. Apply the membrane in valleys before the membrane is applied to the eaves. Following placement along the eaves, continue application of the membrane up the roof. Membrane may be installed either vertically or horizontally after the first horizontal course.

8. Side laps minimum 3-1/2 inches (89 mm) and end laps minimum 6 inches (152 mm) following lap lines marked on underlayment.

9. Patch penetrations and damage using manufacturers’ recommended methods.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect from damage during construction operations and installation of roofing materials. Promptly repair any damaged or deteriorated surfaces.

B. Repair minor damage to eliminate all evidence of repair. Remove and replace work which cannot be satisfactorily repaired in the opinion of the Architect.

C. Provide temporary protection to ensure work being without damage or deterioration at time of final acceptance. Remove protective film and reclean as necessary immediately before final acceptance.

END OF SECTION 07 13 90

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1243
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LATEX BASE MASONRY

WATERPROOFER
07 14 16 - 1
SECTION 07 14 16 – LATEX BASE MASONRY WATERPROOFER
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Waterproofing below grade exterior surface of concrete, cement or concrete block brick, or stone basements, and foundation walls as scheduled.

2. Waterproofing above grade exterior surfaces of concrete, cement, brick, stone or concrete block walls, or ceilings as scheduled.

3. Waterproofing below grade interior surface of concrete, cement, brick, stone or concrete block basements and foundation walls as scheduled.

4. Waterproofing above grade interior surfaces of concrete, cement, brick, stone or concrete block walls, or ceilings as scheduled.

5. Waterproofing above or below grade non-potable water tanks, pools, lagoons, ponds, fountains or water features as scheduled.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.

2. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Unit.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM)

1. ASTM D 16 – Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications.

2. ASTM D 1653 Method A (Dry Cup) – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Organic Coating Films.

3. ASTM D 6904 – Standard Practice for Resistance to Wind-Driven Rain for Exterior Coatings Applied to Masonry.

4. ASTM D 7088 – Standard Practice for Resistance to Hydrostatic Pressure for Coatings Used in Below Grade Applications Applied to Masonry.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, materials descriptions and tested physical properties of water proofing.

2. Include manufacturer’s instructions for evaluating, preparing and treating substrate.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1244
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LATEX BASE MASONRY

WATERPROOFER
07 14 16 - 2
D. Samples:

1. For each product specified, two samples, minimum 4 inches square, representing actual product color and texture.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Division 1 General Provisions.

B. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company with minimum 15 years of experience in manufacturing of specified products and systems.

2. Applicator Qualifications: Company with minimum of 5 years’ experience in application of waterproofing as specified in this section on projects of similar size and scope, and employs installers and supervisors who are trained by and acceptable to product manufacturer.
a. Successful completion of a minimum of 5 projects of similar size and complexity to specified Work.

C. Field Mock-up:

1. Install at Project site or pre-selected area of building an area for field mock-up, as directed by Architect.

2. Apply material in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written application instructions.

3. Manufacturer’s representative or designated representative will review technical aspects; surface preparation, application, and workmanship.

4. Field sample will be standard for judging workmanship on remainder of Project.

5. Maintain field mock-up during construction for workmanship comparison.

6. Do not alter, move, or destroy field mock-up until Work is completed and approved by Architect.

7. Obtain Architect’s written approval of field mock-up before start of material application, including approval of aesthetics, color, texture, and appearance.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Division 1 General Provisions.

B. Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

C. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

D. Transport and store in unopened containers and keep in clean, dry condition protected from rain, dew, and humidity.

E. Do not allow DRYLOK® to freeze.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not apply in rain or when rain is expected within 24 hours. Do not apply above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C) or below 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) or when temperatures are expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) within 24 hours.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1245
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LATEX BASE MASONRY

WATERPROOFER
07 14 16 - 3

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer agrees to replace product or refund product purchase price if product fails to provide a waterproof coating.

1. Warranty Period: 15 years from application.

2. Specific Warranty Limitations:
a. Review manufacturer website: http://www.drylok.com/warranty/ugl-drylokextrememasonry-waterproofer-15-year-warranty.pdf for complete warranty details.

3. Warranty Inspection: Manufacturer representative or designated representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from the following manufacturer:

1. United Gilsonite Laboratories (UGL), which is located at 1396 Jefferson Avenue, P.O. Box 70 Scranton, PA 18501
Customer Service: 1-800-845-5227 or 1-570-344-1202
Email: [email protected]
Website: www.ugl.com
B. Substitutions: Not Permitted.

C. Specifications and Drawings are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature from United Gilsonite Laboratories (UGL).

D. Single Source Limitation for Complete System: Obtain materials from a single manufacturer to create a complete system.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Latex based coating for concrete and masonry that resists both positive and negative hydrostatic pressure.

1. Acceptable Product:
a. DRYLOK® EXTREME Latex Base Masonry Waterproofer

2.3 MIXING
A. Stir thoroughly before and during application. Do not thin.

B. Color:

1. White

2. Custom color. Refer to Drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Comply with Section 01 70 00.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1246
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set LATEX BASE MASONRY

WATERPROOFER
07 14 16 - 4

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Ensure that substrates are sound and free of dust, dirt, paints, form oils, wax curing compounds, or other contaminants that could impair bond of the coating. Old paint in poor condition must be removed by wire-brushing, sand blasting or other suitable means.

B. Ensure substrate has properly cured. Concrete should obtain 80 percent of design strength. If efflorescence is present, remove it with DRYLOK® ETCH or muriatic acid before proceeding.

3.3 APPLICATION - GENERAL
A. Stir DRYLOK® EXTREME thoroughly during application.

B. Apply coating directly on to bare masonry with a DRYLOK® Brush, nylon bristle brush or equivalent stiff fiber brush or by textured spray equipment. Spray or back-brush first coat to fill pores of masonry and achieve uniformity.

C. Two coats shall be applied. Allow first coat to cure 3 hours, then apply second coat by brush, spray or roller.

D. Examine finished surface after two coats and inspect for any leaking, open pores or pinholes. If observed, spot-treat rejected areas, repaint entire surface with another coat of DRYLOK® EXTREME and reinspect.

E. Allow coating to cure 7 to 10 days before immersion in water.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean waterproofing material from tools and equipment with water. Remove cured materials by washing or scraping.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect work from damage of other trades during construction. Correct deficiencies or damage by cleaning or recoating, as approved by Architect.

END OF SECTION 07 14 16

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1247
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-1
SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Mineral Wool batt insulation for Walls.

2. Mineral Wool batt insulation for Ceilings.

3. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Rigid Insulation for Roofs.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 25 00 - Weather Barriers.

2. Section 07 41 13 – Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels: for additional Canopy Roof assembly information.

3. Section 07 52 16 – SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing: for additional Tapered Polyisocyanurate Rigid Roof Insulation Installation information.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Rigid Board Insulation Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, representing actual product.

1. Submit 6 by 6 inch (152 mm by 152 mm) samples of each board type required.

2. Submit samples of each fastener type required.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each product.

B. Manufacturer's Certificates: Manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements.

C. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Up: If requested, provide a mock-up of materials proposed for use for review of workmanship. Accepted mock-ups may remain in place.

B. Preconstruction Meeting: Convene a minimum of two weeks prior to commencing work of this section. Agenda shall include materials proposed for use, sequence of construction and coordination with installation of adjacent and covering materials.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1248
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-2

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the brand name and manufacturer’s identification.

B. Storage: Store materials in dry locations with adequate ventilation, free from water, and in such a manner to permit easy access for inspection and handling.

C. Handling: Handle using procedures recommended by the manufacturer for materials and personnel.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Provide manufacturer’s standard limited warranty against manufacturing defects.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CEILING AND WALL INSULATION - MINERAL WOOL BATT INSULATION A. Product: ROCKWOOL Comfortbatt for Steel Stud; unfaced.

1. R-Value: R-38 (ceilings), R-24 (6” stud walls), R-15 (3-5/8” stud walls)

2. Density: > 2 lbs/ft³ (>32 kg/m³) nominal.

3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Tested in accordance with ASTM E84 a. Unfaced: Flame Spread 0 and Smoke Developed 0

4. Moisture Resistance: Absorption of less than 0.03 percent by volume, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1104.

5. Corrosion Resistance: Non-corrosive/Passed, when tested in accordance with ASTM C665 for Steel & ASTM C795 for Stress Corrosion Cracking Tendency of Austenitic Stainless Steel.

6. Fungi resistance: Zero mold growth to ASTM C1338

7. Recyclability: Material to be capable of being fully recyclable at end of life with the intention of sending zero waste to landfill.

8. Environmental Product Declaration (EPD): Material must be included on a UL Certified EPD in accordance with EN 15804 and ISO 14025.

9. GREENGUARD Gold Certified
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal:

1. Rockwool.

2. Johns Manville.

3. Owens Corning.

2.2 ROOF INSULATION - TAPERED FOAM RIGID INSULATION
A. TAPERED FOAM RIGID INSULATION - Tapered Foam Roof Insulation with FiberReinforced Facers: closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam core and bonded to fiber-reinforced facers on both sides; conforming to ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1 with square edges.

1. Manufactured using 3rd Generation Zero ODP, EPA Compliant Blowing Agent; Contains zero CFCs, HCFCs, or HFCs; Virtually no Global Warming Potential (GWP)

2. Fire Ratings: UL 790 (ASTM E 108), Class A.

3. FM Approval, Wind Uplift Classification: 1-90.

4. Compressive Strength: 25 pounds per square inch (172 kPa) Grade 3.

5. R Value: Provide Insulation with LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) in accordance with ASTM C 1289.
a. Minimum insulation thickness: 1”

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1249
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-3

6. Slope of tapered board shall be:
a. Slope as indicated on the Drawings
b. 2% slop to drain, verify w/ architect
B. Physical properties (Foam Core Only):

1. Compressive Strength: ASTM D 1621 and ASTM C 1289, Type II, 25 psi (172 kPa) for Grade 3.

2. Dimensional Stability: ASTM D 2126, 2 percent linear change (7 days).

3. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96, < 1 perm ((57.5ng/(Pa•s•m2)).

4. Water Absorption: ASTM C 209, < 1 percent by volume.

5. Service Temperature: Minus 100 degrees to 250 degrees F (Minus 73 degrees C to 122 degrees C).

6. Foam Core R Values: Based on LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) in accordance with ASTM C 1289.

7. Foam core flame spread index of 75 or less and smoke developed of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal:

1. Firestone.

2. Siplast.

3. GAF, EnergyGuard.

4. Johns Manville ENRGY 3.

2.2 ACCESSORIES - TAPERED FOAM RIGID INSULATION
A. Approved Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by FM Approvals and system manufacturer; length required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with distribution plates if required.

B. Base Ply: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

C. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D 312, Type III, or Type IV.

1. Use only on approved board insulation types.

2. Provide with labels indicating flash point, softening point, finished blowing temperature and equiviscous temperature.

D. Cant Strip and Tapered Edge Strip: Standard machine cut perlite or wood fiberboard strips in sizes indicated or required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to rain at any time.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1250
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-4
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Batt & Board Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.

5. Tape all seams in faced insulation.

C. Rigid Insulation: Install insulation as shown on Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer for specific roof condition. See Section 07 51 13 Built-up Asphalt Roofing – for additional installation specifications.

1. Install specified insulation in accordance with manufacturer's latest printed instructions and as required by governing codes and Owner's insurance carrier.

2. Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover and waterproof immediately after installation.

3. Seal exposed insulation joints at the end of each day. Remove seal when work resumes.

4. Remove installed insulation that has become wet or damaged and replace with new solid and dry insulation material.

5. Built-Up and Modified Bitumen Systems:
a. Secure each panel to the roof deck with Factory Mutual approved fasteners and plates (appropriate to the deck type).
b. Butt edges and stagger joints of adjacent panels.
c. Multi-layer systems: Adhere subsequent layers with FM approved cold adhesive.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1251
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set THERMAL INSULATION 07 21 00-5
d. In multi-layer installations, stagger joints in top and bottom layers. Do not align joints in insulation.
e. Install the roof covering according to the roof manufacturer's specifications.

D. Vapor Retarders:

1. Seal all seams in exterior wall insulation with vapor retarder tape.

2. Application of vapor retarder must be directed by the architect or engineer of record.

3. For continuous vapor barrier, repair all tears in insulation foil-facing with vapor retarder tape.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

B. Do not leave panels exposed to moisture. Wet panels shall be removed or allowed to completely dry prior to application of vapor barrier and/or roof covering.

C. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 21 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1252
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 1
SECTION 07 25 00 - WEATHER BARRIERS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:

1. Self-adhering sheet Water Resistive air Barriers (referenced on plans as W.R.B) at Wall Exterior and Self Adhered Flashing (S.A.F.) at window openings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 04 22 00 Concrete Masonry Unit for CMU wall substrate.

2. Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry for plywood substrate at parapets

3. Section 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing for horizontal surface substrate.

4. Section 07 41 13 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels

5. Section 07 42 51 Adhered Porcelain Tile Cladding System for tile cladding over weather barriers.

6. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

7. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

8. Section 09 28 13 Cementitious Backing Boards for framed wall substrate.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.

B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.

C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1253
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 2
C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

2. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.

3. Details shall be project specific beyond those typically published by the product manufacturer showing intended substrates and integrations with adjacent systems.

4. Submit shop drawings to manufacturer for review and approval prior to submitting to Architect.

5. Provide plans and elevations to indicate extent of materials and location of details.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier.

C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

D. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An entity specializing in the installation of air barrier systems with a minimum 5 years documented experience that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in production of waterproofing and air barrier systems with minimum 10 years documented continuous experience in the manufacture of permeable water-resistive air barrier products and employing experienced inhouse technical and field observation personnel qualified to provide expert technical support.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, wrapped in a polythene sleeve, labeled with manufacturer's name, and product brand name.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.

1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1254
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 3

2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide manufacturer's written material warranty agreeing to replace air barrier membrane materials installed in conformance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions that fail within 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer’s Warranty: Provide installer’s written 2-year warranty upon completion of work.

Include removing and reinstalling collateral materials associated with replacement of waterproofing that fails within specified warranty period. Coordinate warranty period with other specification sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous weather barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins to installed waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

2.3 SELF-ADHERING SHEET AIR AND WATER BARRIER, PERMEABLE A. Sheet: self-adhering sheet membrane consisting of a breathable carrier film with a specially designed adhesive, which permits the transfusion of water vapor and provides superior protection against the damaging effects of air and water ingress on building structures.

1. Available Products:
a. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier VPS, or equal.
b. Henry Blueskin VP160, or equal.

2. Physical and Performance Properties:
a. Air Permeance: Less then 0.002 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178.
b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 15 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method.

2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. General: Accessory materials shall be single source and shall be recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and shall be compatible with primary air-barrier membrane.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1255
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 4
C. Self Adhered Flashing (S.A.F.): Grace (GCP) VYCOR V40 Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4- mil- thick, cross-laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing; Grace Perm-a-Barrier Detail Membrane.

D. Foil-Faced Self-Adhered Detail Membrane: 35 mils of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 5 mils of aluminum film to provide a minimum 40 mils thick membrane, Grace Perm-a-Barrier Aluminum Flashing.

E. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade. Grace Bituthene Liquid Membrane.

F. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

G. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

H. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, selfadhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

I. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." J. Factory Formed Corners: Grace Vycorners
K. Liquid Applied Flashing: Can be used around entire rough openings. Apply per Manufacturer’s recommendations.
a. Grace Perm-A-Barrier Liquid Flashing, or equal.
b. Henry Air-Bloc LF, or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1256
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 5
D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

1. Install modified bituminous strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch.

E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

F. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 INSTALLATION WEATHER BARRIER AT WALLS
A. General: Install modified bituminous sheets and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self-adhering, modified bituminous air-barrier sheet produced for low- temperature application. Do not install low-temperature sheet if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F.

B. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

1. Install modified bituminous strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of termination mastic on horizontal inside corners.

C. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations with termination mastic and according to ASTM D 6135.

D. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier sheet on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

E. Apply and firmly adhere modified bituminous sheets horizontally over area to receive air barrier. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure airtight installation.

1. Apply sheets in a shingled manner to shed water without interception by any exposed sheet edges.

2. Roll sheets firmly with a manufacturer approved hand roller to enhance adhesion to substrate.

F. Apply continuous modified bituminous sheets over modified bituminous strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

G. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air-barrier sheet with an additional 6-inch- wide, modified bituminous strip.

H. Seal exposed edges of sheet at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with compatible sealant.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1257
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 6
I. Install air-barrier sheet and accessory materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier.

1. Coordinate air-barrier installation with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

J. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier membrane continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

K. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly with a manufacturer approved hand roller to enhance adhesion.

L. At end of each working day, seal top edge of air-barrier material to substrate with termination mastic.

M. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

N. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with air-barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions.

O. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.

P. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF WEATHER BARRIERS AT ROOFS
A. Cut the membrane in 10-15 ft. lengths. Peel back 1-2 ft. of release liner, align the membrane, and continue to peel the release liner from the membrane. Press the membrane in place with heavy hand pressure. Side laps shall be a minimum of 3.5 in. and end lap a minimum of 6 in.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1258
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set WEATHER BARRIERS 07 25 00 - 7

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed Work, using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturers of affected construction.

END OF SECTION 07 25 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1259
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 1
SECTION 07 41 13 – STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

A. Prefinished, prefabricated standing seam roof system with continuous interlocking field formed seams in the following applications:

1. Facilities Building Canopy: Roof standing seam metal panels.

2. Cover Boards
B. Coordinate with installation of roofing substructure.

C. Provide color coordinated hip, gable, and valley flashings, ridge and peak caps, eave and shelf drips, and counter-flashings.

D. Provide clips, fasteners, closures, and sealants as necessary to meet design criteria and ensure weathertight installation.

B. Related Requirements:

A. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel Framing
B. Section 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
C. Section 06 16 43 Gypsum Sheathing
D. Section 07 13 90 Roofing Underlayment
E. Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
F. Section 07 25 00 Weather Barriers
G. Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
H. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Reference Standards:

A. ASCE 7: Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures.

B. ASTM A653: Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot Dip Process.

C. ASTM A792: Steel Sheet, 55 % Aluminum Zinc Alloy Coated by the Hot Dip Process.

D. ASTM C1371: Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.

E. ASTM C1549: Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.

F. ASTM D523: Specular Gloss.

G. ASTM E1592: Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

H. ASTM E283: Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

I. ASTM E331: Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

J. ASTM E1918: Measuring Solar Reflectance of Horizontal and Low Sloped Surfaces in the Field.

K. ASTM E1980: Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

L. CRRC-1 Method #1: Measuring Solar Reflectance of a Flat, Opaque, and Heterogeneous Surface Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer.

M. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1260
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 2
N. UL 580: Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies O. US Environmental Protection Agency: Energy Star Reflective Roof Products P. US Green Building Council (USGBC): Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED)

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:

A. The panel system shall bear fully documented proof that it has been independent laboratory evaluated using the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Guide Specification (CEGS) 07416.

1. Testing shall include establishment of ultimate and allowable system uplift capacities for both the “field” and “areas of discontinuity.”

2. “Proof” shall be defined as both the manufacturer and the product being included in the document entitled: “List of Approved Standing Seam Metal Roof Systems” as published by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.

B. Provide UL 90 rated roofing system that has been tested in accordance with UL 580 test procedure.

C. Provide Factory Mutual (FM) rated panel assembly (16” SpanLok hp).

D. Provide factory preformed panel system that has been pretested and certified by manufacturer to comply with specified requirements under installed conditions.

E. Provide one piece, single length roof panel where possible.

F. Provide continuous interlocking field formed standing seam that inherently increases load span capability, stiffness and flexural stress handling capacity.

G. Provide panel capable of spanning 5’0” purlin spacing and maintain UL 90 wind uplift rating.

H. Provide continuous factory installed foamable hot-melt, or butyl mastic sealant within the confines of the panel’s female leg
B. Structural Requirements:

A. Panel structural properties determined in accordance with latest edition of American Iron and Steel Institute’s “Cold Formed Steel Design Manual,” using “effective width” concepts.

B. Provide confirmation of positive and negative buckling moments and uplift capacity determined by full-scale tests.

C. Substrate Criteria:

A. UL90 Design Criteria: Engineer roofing system based on galvanized steel purlins capable of withstanding Class 90 loading as per UL protocol 580 applied at 90 degrees to surface and spaced as shown. (Not to exceed 5’0” o.c.).

D. Environmental Requirements: Actual independent laboratory certified test results must be submitted.

A. Resistance to air infiltration: Span-Lok and Span-Lok hp – .022 cfm per linear foot of joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680 at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf. SpanSeam – .002 cfm per linear foot of joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1680 at static test pressure differential of 12.00 psf B. Resistance to water infiltration: Span-Lok and Span-Lok hp – No leakage through panel joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646 at static test pressure differential of

15.00 psf. SpanSeam – No leakage through panel joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1646 at static test pressure differential of 20.00 psf.

C. Resistance to Water Penetration: No leakage through panel sideseams and endlaps after six (6) hours when tested in accordance with ASTM E2140 at a static water pressure head of six (6) inches.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1261
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 3

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s specifications, standard detail drawings, and installation instructions
C. Shop Drawings:

A. Submit shop drawings indicating thickness and dimensions of parts, fastenings and anchoring methods, details and locations of seams, transitions and other provisions necessary for thermal expansion and contraction.

B. Indicate roof terminations, clearly showing flashings and change of direction caps.

C. Clearly indicate locations of field- and factory-applied sealant.

D. Show locations and types of hold-down clips and fasteners.

E. Provide plan showing layout of entire roof.

D. Samples:

A. Submit two samples, 12 inches long by full panel width, showing proposed metal thickness and seam profile.

B. Submit standard color samples of metal for Architect’s selection.

C. Submit Custom color samples 8” x 10” for Architect’s selection.

E. Manufacturer Qualifications.

F. Installer Qualifications: Submit list of completed projects, with names and contact information for architects and contractors.

G. Test Reports: Indicating compliance of products with project requirements. Submit test reports prepared by (UL) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. indicating wind uplift rating of proposed roof system.

H. Warranty Documentation.

I. Insurance Documentation.

J. Certification: Submit manufacturer’s certification that materials and finishes meet specification requirements.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

A. Ten years' experience, minimum, in factory fabrication of standing seam roofs.

B. Manufacturer shall provide proof of $2,000,000 liability insurance for their metal roof system.

C. Products listed in this specification section are as manufactured by AEP Span.

D. No other bidder of standing seam roof panels will be accepted without prior written approval of Architect based upon other manufacturer’s products meeting specified requirements.

E. The roof panel manufacturer must also subscribe to Underwriters Laboratories “Follow Up Service” assuring continuing product compliance with UL requirements. Shipment packaging of panels and attachment clips must bear UL classification markings.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1262
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 4
F. Substitution requests must be submitted in writing minimum ten days prior to bid date accompanied by product literature, technical information, and product sample. Approved substitutions will be set forth in an addendum.

G. No substitutions will be permitted after bid date.

B. Installer Qualifications:

A. Three years' experience, minimum, in application of high performance standing seam roofs.

B. Five satisfactory projects with metal panel work of similar scope and complexity to Work of this Project.

C. Installer must be approved by manufacturer in writing prior to bid. Approval document must be included with project bid.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: Agency compliant with ISO/IEC Standard 17025, or an accredited independent agency recognized by the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement or ANSI.

D. Regulatory Requirements:

A. Comply with requirements of applicable building codes and other agencies having jurisdiction for wind uplift rating of standing seam roofs.

E. Mock-Ups:

A. Roof Visual Mock-Up: Construct mock-up, 1 by 4 feet or larger as required to show at least two pattern repeats, and in same orientation as Roof Panels.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and Handling Requirements:

A. Keep panels and accessory items dry.

B. Protect against damage and discoloration.

C. Handle panels with non-marring slings.

D. Support panels to prevent permanent deformation.

E. Store panels above ground, with one end elevated for drainage.

F. Protect panels against standing water and condensation between adjacent surfaces.

G. If panels become wet, immediately separate sheets, wipe dry with clean cloth, and keep sheets separate for air-drying.

H. Painted panels shall be shipped with protective plastic sheeting or a strippable film coating between panels. Remove strippable film coating prior to installation. Do not allow strippable film coating to remain on panels in extreme heat, cold, or direct sunlight or other UV source.

I. Do not allow panels to contact treated lumber.

B. Protect products and accessories from damage and discoloration during transit and at project site. Store sheets and components in dry storage area to prevent condensation.

C. Do not overload roof structure with stored materials. Do not permit material storage or traffic on completed roof surfaces.

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer’s standard 25-year performance warranty, stating the following:

A. Architectural fluorocarbon finish:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1263
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 5

1. Will be free of fading or color change in excess of 5 Hunter delta-E units as determined by ASTM D2244-02.

2. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 8 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D4214-98 method D659.

3. Will not peel, crack, chip, or delaminate.

B. Metal substrate will not rupture, fail structurally, or perforate.

B. Installer's Warranty: Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, covering repairs required to maintain roof panels watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two years following Project Substantial Completion date.

A. Furnish written warranty, signed by installer.

C. Contractor’s Warranty:

A. Warrant panels, flashings, sealants, fasteners and accessories against defective materials and/or workmanship, to remain watertight and weatherproof with normal usage for two (2) years following Project Substantial Completion date.

D. Manufacturer’s Watertightness Warranty:

1. Contact AEP Span sales department for watertightness warranty information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER
A. Metal Roof Panels: AEP Span, A Division of ASC Profiles Inc., 2110 Enterprise Boulevard, West Sacramento, CA 95691. 800-733-4955. Tacoma: 2141 Milwaukee Way, Tacoma, Washington 98421. Fontana: 10905 Beech Avenue, Fontana, California 92337 B. Cover Boards: Georgia Pacific, LLC
A. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Roof Board: DensDeck Prime Roof Board.

2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Products: Provide the following:

A. Roof Panels: AEP Span, a Division of ASC Profiles, Inc.; Span-Lok HP, 16” Panels.

B. Cover Boards: ¼” Dens Deck; mechanically fastened
B. Follow Substitution procedure outlined in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions.

C. Performance Criteria
A. Wind Uplift: As required by ASCE 7 to 20 PSF.

1. Panel system shall be ASTM E1592 tested under the supervision of an ANSI or ISO/IEC accredited laboratory and the laboratory shall issue the test report.

2. Select Seam Narrow Batten UL Construction #397, minimum 22 gauge panels, when installed over 5/8” gypsum sheathing, with roof panel fastener clips spaced 24” on center maximum.

3. Deflection Limits: Withstand wind loads with deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.

A. Air Infiltration: <0.02 cfm per linear foot of joint when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283 at static test pressure differential of 20.0 psf.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1264
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 6
B. Water Penetration Under Static Pressure: No leakage through panel joints when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at static test pressure differential of 25.0 psf.

C. Thermal Movements: Accommodate thermal movement without buckling, joint opening, overstressing components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects, through the following temperature changes:

1. 120 degrees F, ambient.

2. 180 degrees F, material surface.

D. Sustainability Characteristics:

A. Recycled Content: 28.9 percent post-consumer recycled content.

B. Energy Performance:

1. Solar reflective index (SRI): Not less than 22 per ASTM E1980.

C. Shipping Distance: Provide panels manufactured at the following factory:

1. Fontana, California 92335
E. Manufacturing Characteristics: Provide panels complying with provisions of Buy American Act 41 U.S. C 10a - 10d.

2.3 PANELS
A. Prefinished Galvalume® or Zincalume® sheet, ASTM AZ50 made of 55% aluminum,

1.6% silicon and the balance zinc as described in ASTM specification A792

1. 22 Gauge: Yield strength 50,000 psi
B. Fabricate panels with sufficient thickness to meet specified UL 90 wind uplift requirements.

C. Panel Width and Pattern:

1. Roof Panel: Span-Lok HP, 16-inch panel width, flat pan.

C. Fabricated panel with integral continuous overlapping seams suitable for continuous locking or crimping by mechanical means during installation.

D. Seam Height: 2” high on SLHP-216 (Span-Lok hp).

E. Provide pre-installed, high grade, butyl mastic, within the confines of panel’s female leg, designed to seal against adjacent male panel leg.

F. Acceptable Standing Seam System: SLHP-216 (Span-Lok hp) by AEP Span G. Panel Finish: Provide primer and top finish coat on exposed faces; provide primer and backer coat on concealed faces of panels.

1. DuraTech® 5000: Polyvinylidine Fluoride, full 70 percent Kynar 500®or Hylar 5000®, consisting of a baked-on 0.15-0.20 mil corrosion resistant primer and a baked-on 0.70-0.80 mil finish coat with a specular gloss of 8 to 15 when tested in accordance with ASTM D523 at 60 degrees.

2. Panel Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range and Custom Colors. a) Canopy Roof Panel: Custom Charcoal Gray, [ALT 1 AEPSPAN Cool Zinc Gray], Alternates. Final color to be approved by Architect.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1265
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 7
H. Seam Sealant: Factory apply high-grade butyl mastic sealant within the confines of narrow batten, designed to seal against adjacent male panel legs.

2.4 FRAMING AND SUBSTRATES
A. Secondary Framing: See Section 06 17 19 "Cross-Laminated Timber (CLT)".

B. Insulation: See Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
C. Sheathing: See Section 06 16 43 "Gypsum Sheathing".

D. Roofing Underlayment: See Section 07 13 90 “Roofing Underlayment”.

2.5 CLIPS AND FASTENERS
A. Bearing Plate: 22ga minimum See Metal Construction Association Technical Bulletin "Fastener Selection". Usually retain first option; retain second option if UL Class 90 is required.

B. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer for performance indicated.

C. Typical clip:UL 90 requirements:

A. Fasteners: Manufacturer’s standard #12 - 14 x 1 1/4” long self-drilling, self-tapping hex head drive screws for metal; noncorrosive base material.

B. UL Rated Clip: Sliding 22 gauge galvanized steel hook in combination with a double fastened 16 gauge galvanized steel base, both at Fy (MIN) = 33 ksi. Clip hook shall have a shop installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip locations.

D. Typical Low Clip: Requirements:

1. Fasteners: as per manufacturer’s recommendation.

2. Sliding 26 gauge at Fy=40ksi (MIN) galvanized steel hook in combination with a double fastener 18 gauge at Fy = 50 ksi (MIN) galvanized steel base. Clip hook shall have a shop installed hot-melt butyl sealant for continuity of seal at clip locations.

E. Standard Fasteners: Same as UL 90 fasteners specified above.

2.6 COVER BOARDS
A. Cover Board: Glass-mat faced gypsum board complying with ASTM C1177/C1177M.

A. Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

B. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

C. Products:

1. Georgia-Pacific; DensDeck® Prime with EONIC™ Technology: www. buildgp.com.

2. Georgia-Pacific; DensDeck® StormX™ Prime: www. buildgp.com.

3. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

B. Attachment: Mechanical fasteners as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

2.7 ACCESSORIES
A. Trims and Flashings: Material, metal thickness, and finish to match panels. Profiles indicated in Drawings.

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard accessories and other items essential to completeness of standing seam roof installation.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1266
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 8
B. Panel Penetration Flashings: As recommended by panel manufacturer; designed to provide sufficient movement to prevent creation of points of fixity at penetrations.

C. Sealant for Field Application: High grade non-curing butyl or curing urethane sealant as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. See Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants".

2.8 FABRICATION
A. Fabrication, General:

A. Unless otherwise shown on Drawings or specified herein, fabricate panels in continuous lengths and fabricate flashings and accessories in longest practical lengths. Contact AEP Span if panel lengths required over 60 feet.

B. Panels shall be factory correctively-leveled.

B. Panels:

A. Provide panel widths of 16”, 2” high standing seam
B. Provide panels in full length from ridge to eave when possible.

C. Where single length panels are not practical, provide mated swaged panels for positive joint end laps, shingled to accommodate water run-off (fabricated with overlap in direction of water flow).

D. Roof panels shall have flush horizontal and vertical surfaces to facilitate sealing at terminations. Panel configurations which create voids and requiring supplemental closure devices shall not be considered acceptable.

E. Engineer panels to use concealed anchors that permit expansion and contraction, except at eaves, end laps, ridges, valleys, hips and gables.

F. Onsite roll formed panels must meet applicable UL & FM requirements, and onsite roll forming equipment must have active certification through UL.

C. Seams:

A. Panel seams shall interlock entire length of seam.

B. Design standing seam to lock up and resist joint disengagement during design wind uplift conditions as calculated according to local building codes.

C. Provide pre-installed sealant within confines of panel’s female leg to aid in resistance of leaks and provide panel-to-panel seal while allowing expansion and contraction movement, and the seams shall be continuously locked or crimped together by mechanical means during installation.

D. Clips:

A. Provide UL listed clip designed to allow panels to thermally expand and contract and provide ± 1 inch of thermal movement. Clip shall incorporate a self-centering feature to allow 1” of movement in both directions along panel length.

B. Clip shall be designed to meet positive and negative pressures as calculated per local building code.

E. Fabrication Tolerances:

A. Flat metal surfaces will display waviness commonly referred to as “oil canning”. This is caused by steel mill tolerances and is a characteristic, not a defect, of panels manufactured from light gauge metal. Panels are factory correctively-leveled to minimize the occurrence of “oil canning”. As such, “oil canning” will not be accepted as cause for rejection.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1267
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 9
A. Verification of Conditions: With Installer present.

A. Examine conditions and substrates on which metal panels are to be installed. Structural support or substrate shall be flat and plumb to avoid panel stresses and distortion.

B. Prior to starting work, correct defects.

B. Field Measurements:

A. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress.

B. Field measure prior to fabrication. Show recorded dimensions on shop drawings, including locations of shop-fabricated openings.

C. If field measurements differ from drawing dimensions, notify Architect prior to fabrication.

C. Substrate Tolerances: Deviations from flat plane shall not exceed the following.

A. 1/4 inch in 20 feet.

B. 1/2 inch across building elevation.

C. 1/8 inch in 5 feet.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Substrate and Underlayment: Install according to approved shop drawings and metal panel manufacturer's recommendations.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Panels and Trim: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation and erection for weather tight installation.

A. Install according to approved shop drawings.

B. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations.

Anchor securely in place using clips and fasteners spaced in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for design wind load criteria.

C. Comply with methods and recommendations of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual for flashing configurations required.

D. Discrepancies between job site conditions and shop drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect for resolution.

E. Cutting and Fitting:

1. Cut panels neat, square, and true with shearing action cutters. Torch or power saw cutting is prohibited.

2. Openings 6 inches and larger: Shop fabricate and reinforce to maintain original load capacity.

3. Openings less than 6 inches: Field cutting is acceptable.

F. Dissimilar Metals or Materials:

1. Where panel or trim may come in contact with dissimilar metals or treated lumber, fabricate transition to facilitate drainage and minimize possibility of galvanic action.

Galvanic action can cause panels and trim to fail prematurely.

2. At points of contact with dissimilar metal or treated lumber, coat panel and trim with protective paint or separate materials with a weatherproof underlayment.

3. Direct contact or run-off from CCA, ACQ, CA, or other treated lumber (outdoor wood) or fire retardant impregnated or treated wood shakes or siding can cause panels and trim to fail prematurely. Avoid contact with these materials.

B. Accessories: Install trims, flashings, and roofing specialties according to Drawings and manufacturer's recommended details.

C. Sealant Installation: Apply according to approved shop drawings and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual recommendations.

A. Provide airtight and waterproof installation.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1268
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set STANDING SEAM METAL

ROOF PANELS
07 41 13 - 10
D. Installation Tolerances: Match dimensional tolerances of substrate.

3.4 CLEANING
A. Repairs:

A. Touch up paint is not required for panels with scratches that do not expose metal.

B. Panels or flashings with finish damage exposing metal or with substrate damage shall be replaced.

B. Cleaning and Waste Management: See Division 01 for recycling requirements.

A. At completion of each day’s work and at work completion, sweep panels, flashings, and gutters clean. Do not allow fasteners, cuttings, filings, or scraps to accumulate.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of work promptly after completion of installation.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect Work as required to ensure that roofing will be without damage at Final Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 41 13

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1269
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 1
SECTION 07 52 16 - SBS MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL

2.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) modified bituminous cold applied roofing membrane for new construction applications.

B. Cover boards.

C. Insulation.

2.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.

B. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim
C. Section 07 71 00 – Roof Specialties: Manufactured copings, fascias, gravel stops, Manufactured roof expansion joints, and other flashing-related items.

D. Section 08 62 00 – Unit Skylights
E. Division 22 – Plumbing Piping Specialties for roof drains.

F. Section 23 34 16 – Centrifugal HVAC Fans

2.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM C208 - Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board.

B. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

C. ASTM C728 – Standard Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board.

D. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing.

E. ASTM C1278/C1278M - Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel.

F. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board.

G. ASTM D41/D41M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing.

H. ASTM D1970/D1970M - Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.

I. ASTM D2178/D2178M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

J. ASTM D4586/D4586M – Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.

K. ASTM D4601/D4601M – Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing.

L. ASTM D4897/D4897M - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass-Fiber Venting Base Sheet Used in Roofing.

M. ASTM D6163/D6163M - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1270
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 2
N. ASTM D6164/D6164M - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Fiber Reinforcements.

O. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Gravimetric Determination of Water Vapor Transmission Rate of Materials.

P. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-Sloped Opaque Surfaces.

Q. ASTM G154 - Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Ultraviolet (UV) Lamp Apparatus for Exposure of Materials.

R. ASTM G155 - Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of NonMetallic Materials.

S. FM (AG) – Factory Mutual Approval Guide.

T. FM 4470 - Examination Standard for Single-Ply, Polymer-Modified Bitumen Sheet, Built-Up Roof (BUR) and Liquid Applied Roof Assemblies for Use in Class 1 and Noncombustible Roof Deck Construction.

U. FM 4474 - American National Standard for Evaluating the Simulated Wind Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies Using Static Positive and/or Negative Differential Pressures.

V. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design.

W. NRCA (RM) - The NRCA Roofing Manual.

X. NRCA (WM) - The NRCA Waterproofing Manual.

Y. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet
Z. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - Roofing Systems and Materials Guide.

AA. UL (DIR) – Online Certifications Directory.

BB. UL (FRD) - Fire Resistance Directory.

CC. UL 580 - Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies.

DD. UL 1897 - Uplift Tests for Roof-Covering Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

2.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1. Attendees: Owner, Contractor, Architect, Installer, roofing manufacturer's technical representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects the work of this section.

2. Review project requirements, including the following:
a. Preparation and acceptance of substrates.
b. Sequencing and coordination between trades and acceptance of substrates for roofing installation.
c. Approved materials, details and sequencing for transitions, tie-ins, flashings, drainage, penetrations, and curbs.
d. Protection of installed materials.
e. Repair procedures.

2.05 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data for roofing system materials, components, and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Include roof plans and details showing terminations, flashings, penetrations, attachment methods, tie-ins, and interface with adjacent work.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1271
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 3

1. Indicate insulation thicknesses and slopes.

2. Include project-specific tapered insulation layout prepared by roofing manufacturer.

3. Roof plan indicating orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of roof membrane, fastening spacings, and patterns for mechanically fastened roofing system.

D. Samples for Verification: Submit [two] <2> samples [6 by 6] inches in size of cap sheet.

E. Manufacturer's Letter: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

F. Wind Uplift Resistance Submittal: Indicate compliance with wind uplift performance requirements.

G. Field Quality Control Submittals: Field inspection reports.

H. Manufacturer's qualification statement.

I. Installer's qualification statement.

J. Testing firm's qualification statement.

K. Sustainable Design Information:

1. Environmental product declaration (EPD) documentation.

2. Test report showing solar reflectance index (SRI) of membrane.

3. VOC content of adhesives, sealants, and coatings.

L. Specimen Warranty For approval.

M. Executed Warranty.

2.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of this section with at least three years of documented experience and approved by manufacturer for specified warranty.

C. Testing Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified and approved by manufacturer.

2.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. See General Provisions Section 9.12 Project Site Maintenance and Special Provisions Section 18 Cleanup - for Construction Waste Management and Disposal for packaging waste requirements.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals unbroken and labels intact, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture, and within temperature range required by manufacturer.

D. Ensure storage and staging of materials does not exceed static and dynamic load-bearing capacities of roof decking.

E. Protect liquids and foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.

2.08 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Contact roofing manufacturer to confirm acceptable assemblies for special applications.

Conform with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.

C. Do not apply roofing materials when ambient temperature is below 45 degrees unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer in writing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1272
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 4
D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.

E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be covered the same day.

F. Schedule applications so no partially completed sections of roof are left exposed at end of workday.

2.09 GUARANTEE
A. System Guarantee: Provide manufacturer's system guarantee.

1. Guarantee: GAF RUBEROID® Diamond Pledge NDL Roof Guarantee.

2. Term: 20 years.

3. Liability Limit: No dollar limit on covered repairs.

4. Scope of Coverage:
a. Repair of covered leaks resulting from manufacturing defects, ordinary wear and tear, or workmanship in applying the covering materials, subject to certain exclusions. b. Leaks due to winds up to [80 mph (129 km/hr)] , excluding hurricanes and tornados. c. Provide GAF Well Roof Extension for a term up to 25 percent of the original guarantee duration (up to maximum duration of 25 years) when roofing system is inspected and maintained in accordance with manufacturer’s terms and conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

5.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design:

1. GAF; 1 Campus Drive; Parsippany, NJ 07054; Toll Free Tel: 877-423-7663; Email:
[email protected]: www.gaf.com.

2. Substitutions: Equal substitutions may be submitted for Architect’s review.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from roof membrane manufacturer or manufacturers approved by roof membrane manufacturer.

5.02 ROOFING SYSTEM
A. Roofing System Description: Three-ply roofing system; cold adhered; with components listed from top of roof down.

1. Cap Sheet: Granule-surfaced membrane.

2. Base Sheet: Smooth membrane.

3. Cover Board: Glass-mat faced gypsum board, mechanically fastened.

4. Insulation: Minimum two layers, having maximum board thickness of 6 inches (75 mm) . a. Total System R-value (RSI-value): Minimum R-< 6 > [value as indicated in drawings]. b. Slope: Provide minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (1:48) by means of tapered insulation.
c. Top Layers: Polyisocyanurate foam board, noncomposite adhered. d. Bottom Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, noncomposite; mechanically fastened. e. Crickets: Tapered insulation of same type as specified for top layer; minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (1:48) unless otherwise indicated in drawings.

5. Deck Sheathing: mechanically fastened.

B. Performance Requirements:

1. General: Roofing system to withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to ordinary weather conditions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1273
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 5

2. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials and accessories compatible with one another under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by roof membrane manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

3. Wind Uplift Resistance: Design to withstand wind uplift forces in accordance with applicable local building code requirements as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer’s independent testing.
a. Roofing System: Tested in accordance with FM 4474, UL 580, or UL 1897. b. Design Pressures:
1) Base on a 4ft² effective wind area, per ASCE 7 Figure 30.3-2A as follows 2) Zone 1’ (Center Roof Area Field): -16.0psf
3) Zone 1 (Roof Area Field): -19.7psf
4) Zone 2 (Roof Area Perimeter): -26.0psf
(a) Location: From roof edge to 6.5ft inside roof edge. 5) Zone 3 (Roof Area Corners): -35.5psf
(a) Location: 2.5’x6.5’ rectangular area, each direction from building corner.

4. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI): SRI not less than 82 when calculated in accordance with ASTM E1980.

5. Roof Covering External Fire Resistance Classification: Class A when tested per ANSI/UL 790.

5.03 CAP SHEETS
A. Cap Sheet:

1. SBS-Modified Bitumen, Granule-Surfaced Membrane: Glass-fiber-mat cap sheet complying with ASTM D6163/D6163M, Type I, Grade G.

2. Accelerated Weathering: Roof to withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested in accordance with ASTM G154 or ASTM G155.

3. Color: Highly Reflective Bright White

4. Products:
a. GAF RUBEROID® 30 Granule FR Membrane: www.gaf.com.
b. GAF RUBEROID® EnergyCap™ 30 Granule FR Membrane: www.gaf.com. c. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

5.04 BASE SHEETS
A. Sheathing Paper: Red rosin paper, unsaturated, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m).

B. Base Sheet:

1. SBS-Modified Bitumen, Smooth-Surfaced Membrane: Polyester-mat base sheet complying with ASTM D6164/D6164M, Type II, Grade S.

2. Products:
a. GAF RUBEROID® Mop Plus Smooth Membrane: www.gaf.com. b. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

5.05 FLASHING MATERIALS
A. Membrane Flashing: Matching membrane materials and attachment methods as specified for base and cap sheets.

B. PMMA Flashing: Polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) flashing, consisting of flashing resin, catalyst, and reinforcing fleece.

1. Color: White.

2. Product:
a. GAF PMMA Flashing Resin: www.gaf.com.
b. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1274
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 6

5.06 ASPHALT MATERIALS
A. Asphalt Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive, specially formulated for compatibility and use with roofing membrane sheets and base flashing sheets.

1. Product:
a. GAF Matrix 101: www.gaf.com.
b. GAF Matrix 102: www.gaf.com.
c. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

B. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing membrane manufacturer.

1. Product:
a. GAF Matrix 201: www.gaf.com.
b. GAF Matrix 202: www.gaf.com.
c. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

5.07 COVER BOARDS
A. Cover Board: Glass-mat faced gypsum board complying with ASTM C1177/C1177M.

1. Thickness: Type X, 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).

2. Surface Finish: Factory primed.

3. Products:
a. Georgia-Pacific; DensDeck® Prime with EONIC™ Technology: www. buildgp.com. b. Georgia-Pacific; DensDeck® StormX™ Prime: www. buildgp.com. c. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

B. Attachment: Mechanical fasteners as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

5.08 INSULATION
A. Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam,[ non-halogenated, TCPP-free,] complying with ASTM C1289.

1. Classification: Type II, Class 2 - Faced with coated glass fiber mat facers on both major surfaces of the core foam.

2. Mold Growth Resistance: Passing ASTM D3273.

3. Low Temperature Stability: Maintains R-value at 75 degrees F (21 degrees C) and 40 degrees F (5 degrees C) mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.

4. Compressive Strength: [Grade 2, 20 psi (138 kPa)] [Grade 3, 25 psi (172 kPa)] minimum.

5. Board Size: [48 by 96 inches (1220 by 2440 mm)] [48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm)].

6. Tapered Board: Same type as primary roof insulation.

7. Products:
a. GAF; EnergyGuard™ NH Barrier Polyiso Insulation: www.gaf.com. b. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

B. Composite Polyisocyanurate Insulation with High Density Polyisocyanurate Cover Board: Highdensity polyisocyanurate cover board with coated glass facers laminated to closed-cell polyisocyanurate foam, complying with ASTM C1289.

1. Classification, Top Layer: Type IV, Class 4.

2. Compressive Strength, Top Layer: Grade 1, 80 psi (Grade 1, 550 kPa).

3. Board Size: [48 by 96 inches (1220 by 2440 mm)] [48 by 48 inches (1220 by 1220 mm)].

4. Products:
a. GAF; EnergyGuard™ Ultra HD Composite Insulation: www.gaf.com. b. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1275
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 7
C. Attachment: Mechanical fasteners as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

D. Base Sheet: Asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber-mat base sheet, complying with ASTM D4601, Type II.

1. Products:
a. GAF; [GAFGLAS® GAFGLAS® #80 Ultima Base Sheet: www.gaf.com. b. B. Substitutions: See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.20 Substitutions - Product Requirements.

5.09 ACCESSORIES
A. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, primers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

B. Prefabricated Roofing Expansion Joint (to adjacent existing building): Type approved by roofing manufacturer. See Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim.

C. One Way Roof Vents: Roofing manufacturer’s recommended pre-flashed, spun aluminum vent that allows air pressure and moisture vapor to escape roofing system.

D. Wood Nailers, Curbs, and Blocking: See Section 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry.

E. Cant Strips and Tapered Edge Strips: Nonflammable perlite, complying with ASTM C728.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM 4470, designed for fastening roofing components to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

G. Termination Bars: Manufacturer’s standard aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge.

H. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

I. Roofing Granules: Roofing manufacturer's standard ceramic-coated mineral roofing granules; color matching cap sheet.

J. Field Fabricated Walkways: Heavy-duty, slip-resistant, granule-surfaced walkway roll, suitable for maintenance traffic and visually distinctive from roof membrane.

1. Attachment Method: Match cap sheet attachment.

2. Surface Color: Match cap sheet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

8.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

B. Verify deck is supported and secure.

C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.

D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of moisture, snow or ice.

E. Verify roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and nailing strips are in place.

F. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

8.02 PREPARATION - WOOD DECK
A. Verify wood deck conforms with manufacturer's minimum requirements.

1. Minimum Thickness: 15/32-inch (12 mm) for wood sheathing or nominal 1 x 4-inch (25 x 100-mm) for wood planks.

2. Oriented Strand Board (OSB): Structural 1 rated.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1276
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 8

3. Wood Joist Spacing: Not exceeding 24 inches (609 mm) on center.

4. Sheathing: Installed with all four sides bearing on and secured to joists and cross blocking. “H” clips are not acceptable.

B. Verify flatness and tightness of joints in wood decking; fill knot holes with latex filler.

C. Confirm dry deck by moisture meter with [12] <Insert number> percent moisture maximum.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

8.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions[ and FM Approvals RoofNav].

B. Do not apply roofing components during cold or wet weather conditions outside of manufacturer’s approved conditions.

C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside of manufacturer’s required temperature range.

D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring.

E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be covered the same day.

F. Coordinate this work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as work of this section proceeds.

G. Install roof membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition[ and to not void warranty or guarantee for existing roofing system].

H. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

8.04 INSTALLATION - DECK SHEATHING
A. Install deck sheathing with long joints in continuous straight lines and end joints staggered not less than 24 inches (610 mm) in adjacent rows.

B. At metal decks, install deck sheathing at right angle to flutes of deck. Locate end joints over crests of steel roof deck.

C. Install boards with edges loosely abutted together. Cut neatly around penetrations and projections.

D. Mechanical Attachment: Fasten deck sheathing to top flanges of steel deck in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

8.05 INSTALLATION - INSULATION
A. Installation Over Wood and Wood Panel Decking: Attach insulation in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions.

1. Base Sheet: Mechanically fasten base sheet to roof deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening base sheet wood decks.

2. Base Layer: Mechanically fasten base layer of insulation using fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified roof insulation to wood decks.

3. Upper Layers: Adhere upper layers of insulation using insulation adhesive.

B. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered from joints of preceding layer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Place tapered insulation to required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1277
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 9
E. At roof drains, slope insulation down to roof drains with each side equal to the diameter of the drain bowl plus 36 inches (914 mm).

F. Install cant strips at junctures of roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.

G. Do not install more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.

8.06 INSTALLATION - COVER BOARD
A. Install cover board over insulation with joints staggered from joints of insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Trim cover board neatly to fit around penetrations and projections as directed by cover board manufacturer.

C. Mechanical Attachment: Fasten cover board in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

8.07 INSTALLATION – BASE SHEET AND INTER-PLY SHEET
A. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Roll out base sheet and allow to relax.

C. Accurately align base sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Shingle joints on sloped substrates in direction of drainage.

D. Extend base sheet beyond top of cants to minimum dimension required by manufacturer.

E. Mechanically Fastened Base Sheet Attachment:

1. Install base sheet and mechanical attachment devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Attach securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

F. Repair tears and punctures and ensure laps are completely sealed.

8.08 INSTALLATION – CAP SHEET
A. Roll out cap sheet and allow to relax.

B. Accurately align cap sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Shingle joints on sloped substrates in direction of drainage.

C. Adhered Cap Sheet Application:

1. Cold Adhesive: Apply adhesive at prescribed rate and in conformance with manufacturer’s instructions. Bond and apply pressure by means required by manufacturer.

Adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.

2. Apply pressure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions to remove air pockets and achieve complete adhesion.

D. Repair tears and punctures and ensure laps are completely sealed.

8.09 INSTALLATION – FLASHINGS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Install flashing over cant strips and other sloped and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations, and secure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Install flashing with complete adhesion with no bridging, air pockets, or gaps.

2. Fasten top edge of flashing sheets with manufacturer’s recommended fasteners. Seal penetrations watertight using manufacturer’s sealant or mastic.

B. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.

C. Base Flashing Sheet:

1. Install base flashing sheets on vertical surfaces, down over cants and onto horizontal roof surfaces the minimum dimension required by manufacturer.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1278
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 10

2. Terminate base flashing sheets a minimum of 8 inches (203 mm) and a maximum of 24 inches (610 mm) above roofline.

3. Install corner membrane flashings and seal transitions, terminations, and penetrations according to manufacturer’s instructions.

D. Cap Flashing Sheet:

1. Install cap flashing sheets over base plies and lap onto roof surfaces the minimum dimension required by manufacturer.

2. Install cap sheet stripping where metal flanges and edgings are set on roof in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. PMMA Flashing:

1. Install base coat, reinforcing scrim, and finish coat of liquid flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Extend liquid flashing not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in all directions from edges of item being flashed.

F. Install roofing expansion joints where indicated. Make joints watertight.

G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related flashings. Terminate membranes according to manufacturer’s approved details. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roof membrane in place with clamping ring.

8.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements for independent field inspection requirements, and requirements for monitoring quality of specified product installations.

B. Provide regular on-site attendance of roofing manufacturer's representative during installation of this work.

1. Perform fastener-pullout tests in accordance with roof system manufacturer's requirements. Submit test results to manufacturer within 24 hours after performing tests.

C. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where tests or inspections indicate they do not comply with specified requirements. Perform repairs using manufacturer’s approved repair procedures.

D. Perform additional testing and inspecting at Contractor's expense to determine if repaired or additional work complies with specified requirements.

8.11 CLEANING
A. See Division 1 General Provisions for Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements.

B. Properly dispose of all product wrappers, pallets, cardboard, scrap, waste and debris. Replace damaged material with new materials.

C. Clean adjacent construction where soiled by work of this section. Comply with manufacturer of adjacent construction's instructions and procedures.

8.12 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing system from construction operations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1279
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Building Permit SBS MODIFIED

BITUMINOUS ROOFING
07 52 16 - 11
B. Correct deficiencies in work in accordance with or guarantee requirements. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.

8.13 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide maintenance program agreement for specified GAF Well Roof Extension or Equal.

END OF SECTION 075216

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1280
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -1
SECTION 07 62 00 -- SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Shop- and field-fabricated sheet metal flashing and trim, including:

1. Sheet metal flashing at door and vent openings.

2. Parapet Cap Coping

3. Wall flashing and expansion joints.

3. Exposed trim/fascia units.

5. Miscellaneous accessories and flashing as shown or required.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Unit: steel flashings embedded in masonry.

B. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
C. Section 07 13 90 – Roofing Underlayment
D. Section 07 25 00 – Weather Barriers
E. Section 07 41 13 – Standing Seam Metal Roof Panels
F. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealers

1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 240/A 240M - Standard Specification for Heat Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels.

B. ASTM A 308 - Standard Specification for Sheet, Terne (Lead-Tin Alloy) Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. SSIUS - Designer Handbook Series; Specialty Steel Industry of the United States (SSIUS).

1. Stainless Steel for Roofing, Flashings, Copings.

2. Design Guidelines for the Selection and Use of Stainless Steel.

3. Specifications for Stainless Steel.

4. Stainless Steel Fabrication.

5.. Finishes for Stainless Steel.

6. Stainless Steel Architectural Facts.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1281
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -2
D. SMACNA - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.; seventh edition, 2012.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: Follow procedures outlines in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product.

C. Samples: 12 inch square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces.

D. Samples: 12 inch long samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished work, including specified factory finish.

E. Shop Drawings: Submit layout, profiles, methods of joining, and anchorage details, including major counterflashings, trim/fascia units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers, and expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at 1/4 inch scale and details at 3 inch scale.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm with 5 years of successful experience with installation of flashing and trim similar in type and scope to project requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Galvannealed steel sheet : ASTM A 653 G90 twenty-two [22] gauge GSM – Trim at door and vent openings as shown in Material Finish Schedule and Details.

1. Finish : Kynar coated- Custom pewter gray or as selected and approved by Architect.

B. Galvannealed steel parapet cap and parapet expansion joint cap : ASTM A 653 G90 eighteen [18] gauge GSM – Parapet Cap and Expansion Joint Cap as shown in Material Finish Schedule and Details.

1. Finish : Kynar coated- Custom pewter gray or as selected and approved by Architect.

2. Parapet Expansion Joint Cover: Metal-Era Perma-tite Expansion Joint, or Equal.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, fully annealed, dead soft temper.

1. Thickness: 0.021 inch, 25 gauge, unless otherwise indicated.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1282
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -3

2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

3. Finish: No.2D (dull) mill rolled sheet finish.

4. Finish: As selected by Architect from roofing manufacturer's standards.

D. Stainless Steel Sheet: Terne-coated stainless steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 308, Type 304, fully annealed, dead soft temper.

1. Coating: Coat both sides of stainless steel sheet with terne alloy (80-20 lead/tin) in accordance with sheet metal manufacturer's standard nominal coating weight.

2. Base Metal Thickness: 0.021 inch, 25 gauge, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Base Metal Thickness: As indicated on drawings.

4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Solder: Minimum 50-50 tin/lead solder for unexposed joints; minimum 80-20 tin/lead solder for color match at exposed joints. Use only phosphoric acid based flux for soldering stainless steel.

E. Fasteners: Stainless steel, type 300 series, as recommended by sheet manufacturer.

F. Metal Accessories: Stainless steel clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units as required for installation of work, non-corrosive, size and gage required for performance.

G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat except as otherwise indicated; inert-type non-corrosive compound, nominally free of sulfur components and other deleterious impurities.

H. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; non-hardening, non-skinning, non-drying, non-migrating sealant.

I. Elastomeric Sealant: Type recommended for components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

J. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by sealant manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints including riveted joints.

K. Adhesives: Type recommended for waterproof and weather resistant seaming and adhesive application indicated by manufacturer of stainless steel.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1283
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -4
A. Roofing Felt: Asphalt or coal tar saturated felt weighing not less than 30 lb per 100 square feet.

B. Slip Sheet: 4-lb rosin-sized building paper.

C. Elastic Expansion Joints: Factory-fabricated units of size and profile indicated, with elastic sheet flashing forming the primary joint membrane in a supported bellows arrangement designed to be secured to both sides of expansion joints; underside of bellows insulated with adhesive applied, flexible, closed-cell rubber or plastic not less than 3/8 inch thick.

1. Type: Plain sheet or encapsulated stainless steel flanged edges, for embedment in other construction or nailing to substrates, 4 inches minimum flange width.

2. Type: Stainless steel flanged edges, 3 to 4 inches wide, formed to profiles as indicated to fit curbs and designed for nailing to curb substrate. Provide thickness as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's standards and recommendations.

3. Looped Bellows Width: 5 to 6 inches, exclusive of flanges.

4. Complete with prefabricated corner units, intersection units and splicing materials.

5. Manufacturers: Provide products that comply with project requirements and are made by one of the following:
a. Siplast.
b. Johns Manville.
c. Sika Emseal.

D. Reglets: Units of type and profile indicated, compatible with stainless steel, noncorrosive.

E. Gutter Guards (Leaf Guards): Stainless steel mesh or fabricated units, hinged for cleaning, with selvaged edges and non-corrosive fasteners. Select materials for compatibility with gutters and downspouts.

F. Conductor-Head Guards: Bee-hive type stainless steel mesh or fabricated units, removable for cleaning, with selvaged edges and non-corrosive fasteners. Select materials for compatibility with gutters and downspouts.

G. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic.

2.4 METAL FABRICATION
A. Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible.

B. Conform to dimensions and profiles indicated. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and other recognized industry practices.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1284
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -5
C. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work.

D. Form work to fit substrate. Comply with material manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed stainless steel work without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and avoidable tool marks, true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

E. Seams: Fabricate non-moving joints with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. Rivet joints for additional strength where required.

F. Hooked-Type Joints: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water- or weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant concealed within joints.

G. Sealant Joints: Where movable, non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA standard details.

H. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from different metal types and corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator.

I. Gutter and Downspout Fabrication:

1. Continuously form seamless gutters to the profiles and sizes specified. Form gutter free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

Allow for expansion at corners and joints.

2. Form downspouts of profiles and sizes specified.

3. Field measure conditions prior to fabricating work.

4. Hem exposed edges of material
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate work of this section with adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation to ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1285
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -6

1. Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated.

2. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof.

B. Galvanic Action Protection: Isolate different metal types from each other to prevent galvanic action.

C. Underlayment: Where installation is to be directly on cementitious or wood substrate, install slip sheet over a course of roofing felt.

D. Soldering: Tin uncoated stainless steel surfaces for a width of 1-1/2 inches at edges, using solder recommended for stainless steel work. Exception: Where surfaces are terne-coated stainless steel, do not tin edges, but wire brush terne coating before soldering.

E. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofing cement where required for waterproof performance.

F. Install reglets to receive counterflashing in manner and by methods indicated. Where shown in concrete, furnish reglets to trades of concrete work for installation. Where shown in masonry, furnish reglets to trades of masonry work for installation.

G. Install counterflashing in reglets, either by snap-in seal arrangement or by soldering in place for anchorage and filling reglet with mastic or elastomeric sealant, as indicated and depending on degree of sealant exposure.

H. Install elastic expansion joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Where required, provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing.

2. Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing.

3. Seam adjacent flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches on center.

5. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3 inch overlap, to form a continuous, waterproof system.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed steel surfaces, removing substances that might cause staining, corrosion, or deterioration of finish or that would interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1286
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set SHEET METAL FLASHING & TRIM 07 62 00 -7
B. Protect flashings, sheet metal work, during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 07 62 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1287
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00-1
SECTION 07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manufactured roof expansion joints.

B. Other flashing-related items.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 07 13 90 -- Roofing Underlayment – for roof underlayment and flashing at parapet coping.

B. Section 07 52 16 – SBS Modified Bitumen Roofing.

C. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing & Trim
D. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Material description and application instructions.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate joint locations, dimensions, and adjacent construction.

2. Provide details for transitions in plane and direction for continuity of seal through watertight transitions from wall expansion joint to other interfacing expansion joint systems at adjacent construction.

D. Manufacturer’s Certification that:

1. Products are capable of withstanding temperature of 150 degrees F (65 degrees C) for 3 hours while compressed to minimum of movement capability dimension without evidence of bleeding of impregnation medium from material.

2. Same material after heat stability test and after cooling to room temperature will selfexpand to maximum of movement capability dimension within 24 hours at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C).

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Minimum 15years documented experience in production of specified materials.

B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum two (2) years documented experience in work of this Section.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1288
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ROOF SPECIALTIES 07 71 00-2
PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. SIKA Emseal, 800-526-8365, www.emseal.com, or Equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Deck and Parking Joint Seal

1. Basis of Design: Emshield DFR2 by Sika Emseal

2. Description: Traffic grade upper and lower silicone sealing surface adhered to fire-retardant impregnated foam backing installed into field-applied epoxy adhesive.

3. Form: Precompressed to less than nominal material size for installation into designed joint size equal to material nominal size

4. Fire protection rating: 2 hours, tested to UL 2079

5. Movement capability: Plus or minus 50 percent, total 100 percent

6. Color: To be selected from Sika Emseal full color range.

7. Adhesive: Epoxy type, furnished by joint seal manufacturer

8. Silicone: Field applied sealant band at face of seal to substrate interface, furnished by joint seal manufacturer; same material and color as factory coating a. Abrasion resistance: Maximum 1 percent weight loss, tested to ASTM D4060 b. Fuel resistance: Pass ASTM C719 and ASTM C1135.

9. Intumescent Sealant: Field applied to face of joints, furnished by joint seal manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean joints thoroughly; remove loose and foreign matter that could impair adhesion or performance.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install joint seal in accordance with Sika Emseal instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Remove joint seal from precompressed packaging, immediately insert into joint, and allow to expand.

C. Use temporary retainers if required to maintain joint seals in position until expansion is complete.

END OF SECTION 27 10 06

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1289
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set FIRESTOPPING AND

SMOKE SEALANTS
07 84 00-1
SECTION 07 84 00 – FIRESTOPPING AND SMOKE SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.

2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies, ceilings & roofs.

3. Penetrations and joints in smoke barriers.

4. Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated constructions.

B. Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Joint Sealants: Section 07 92 00.

2. Gypsum Board: Section 09 29 00.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Follow procedures in Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

C. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1.

1. Product Data for CALGreen 5.504.4.1 Adhesives, Sealants, Caulks: Product Data and material safety data sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants used on the project, indicating VOC content of each product used.

D. Product Schedule: For each firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated assembly.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1290
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set FIRESTOPPING AND

SMOKE SEALANTS
07 84 00-2
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for firestopping.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." B. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:

1. Holdrite (Subsidiary of RWC).

2. Grace Construction Products.

3. Hilti, Inc.

4. Johns Manville.

5. 3M Fire Protection Products.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1291
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set FIRESTOPPING AND

SMOKE SEALANTS
07 84 00-3

2.2 FIRESTOPPING
A. Provide firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance rating of construction penetrated. Firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of

0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Construction: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per ASTM E 1966 or UL 2079:

1. Joints include those installed in or between fire-resistance-rated walls, floor or floor/ceiling assemblies and roofs or roof/ceiling assemblies.

2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Equal to or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of construction they will join.

G. Joints in Smoke Barriers: Provide fire-resistive joint systems with ratings determined per UL 2079.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/ft of joint at 0.30 inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

H. Exposed Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

I. Accessories: Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

1. CALGreen Requirements: For CALGreen 5.504.4.1, adhesives, sealants and caulks shall comply with local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district rules or SCAQMD Rule 1168 VOC limits, as shown in Tables 5.504.4.1 and

5.504.4.2 in the California Building Code.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1292
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set FIRESTOPPING AND

SMOKE SEALANTS
07 84 00-4

2. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
c. Fire-rated form board.
d. Fillers for sealants.

3. Temporary forming materials.

4. Substrate primers.

5. Collars.

6. Steel sleeves.

2.3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket.

B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.

E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1293
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set FIRESTOPPING AND

SMOKE SEALANTS
07 84 00-5

1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.4 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:

1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of firestopping.

2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1294
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set FIRESTOPPING AND

SMOKE SEALANTS
07 84 00-6

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION 07 84 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1295
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-1
SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes

1. Silicone joint sealants.

2. Urethane joint sealants.

3. Latex joint sealants.

4. Wall Expansion Joint to Existing Adjacent Building
B. Related Sections

1. Section 09 29 00 "Gypsum Board" for sealing perimeter joints.

2. Section 09 30 00 "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

C. CALGreen Submittals: Submit product data in accordance with Division 1 General Provisions.

D. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS): For storage at project site.

E. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

F. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inch- long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

G. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.

2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.

3. Joint-sealant formulation.

4. Joint-sealant color.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1296
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals: follow procedure outlined in Division 1– General Provisions Section 4.19.

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.

D. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

F. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in “Preconstruction Testing” Article.

G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

H. Wall Expansion Joint Submittals:

1. Samples: Minimum 2” x 2” joint seal samples showing available colors.

2. Manufacturer’s certification that:
a. Products are capable of withstanding temperature of 150 degrees F (65 degrees C) for 3 hours while compressed to minimum of movement capability dimension without evidence of bleeding of impregnation medium from material. b. Same material after heat stability test and after cooling to room temperature will self-expand to maximum of movement capability dimension within 24 hours at 68 degrees F (20 degrees C).

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.

1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness.

D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1297
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3

1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING
A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

1. Use manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.

5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.
i. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

C. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

D. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1298
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-4

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet.

3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications indicated.

4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications.

3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.

4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1299
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. CALGreen Requirements: For CALGreen 5.504.4.1, adhesives, sealants and caulks shall comply with local or regional air pollution control or air quality management district rules or SCAQMD Rule 1168 VOC limits, as shown in Tables 5.504.4.1 and 5.504.4.2 in the California Building Code.

B. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

C. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

E. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.

F. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.

2.3 Structural Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT.

A. Products: Provide the following, or equal:

1. Dow Corning Corporation; 795 or 995.

2.4 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:
a. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; Sikaflex - 15LM. b. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 921.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1300
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-6

2.5 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or equal:
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.
b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.
c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.6 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Preformed Silicone Joint Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealant consisting of precured low-modulus silicone extrusion, in sizes to fit joint widths indicated, combined with a neutralcuring silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following, or equal:

1. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.

2. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; UltraSpan US1100.

2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

1. Provide closed-cell material at all exterior joint applications.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1301
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-7

2.9 WALL EXPANSION JOINT TO EXISTING ADJACENT BUILDING
A. Exterior Wall Joint Seal:

1. Basis of Design: Emshield WFR1 by Sika Emseal, 800-526-8365, www.emseal.com..

2. Description: Silicone coated, ultraviolet resistant, dual-faced, fire-rated, watertight primary wall seal.

3. Form: Precompressed to less than design joint size, packaged in shrink-wrap packaging.

4. Fire protection rating: 1 hour, tested to UL 2079.

5. Movement capability: Plus and minus 50% (total 100%) of nominal material size.

6. R-value: 1.03 per inch depth at nominal joint size compression, tested to ASTM C518.

7. STC rating: 62 in STC 68 wall, tested to ASTM E90.

8. OITC rating: 52 in OITC 52 wall, tested to ASTM E90.

9. Air permeability: Maximum 0.02 liter per second per square meter, tested to ASTM E283 at 75 Pa.

10. Water penetration: No water penetration, tested to ASTM E331 at 5000 Pa test pressure.

11. Wind loading: No deflection, tested to ASTM E330 at 4954 Pa or 200 MPH wind.

12. VOC Emissions: CDPH-1.2-2017: Pass

13. Color: Dark Gray, To be selected from Sika Emseal full color range.

14. Adhesive: Epoxy type, furnished by joint seal manufacturer.

15. Silicone: Field applied corner bead at face of seal to substrate interface, furnished by joint seal manufacturer, in same material and color as used in factory coating. a. Abrasion Resistance: Less than 1% weight loss, tested to ASTM D4060 b. Fuel Resistance: Pass, tested to ASTM C719/C1135

16. Intumescent Sealant: Field applied to face of joints, furnished by joint seal manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1302
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-8
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

3. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1303
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-9

2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.

5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF WALL EXPANSION JOINT TO EXISTING ADJACENT BUILDING A. Install joint seal in accordance with Sika Emseal instructions and approved Shop Drawings.

B. Remove joint seal from precompressed packaging, immediately insert into joint, and allow to expand.

C. Use temporary retainers if required to maintain joint seals in position until expansion is complete.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.

Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION 07 92 00

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1304
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-1
SECTION 08 11 13 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and General and Technical Provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes hollow-metal work and associated louvers.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow-metal doors.

2. Section 09 91 00 “Painting” for finish painting hollow metal doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMMHMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Follow Submittal procedure outlined Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance ratings, and finishes.

C. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door type.

2. Details of doors, including vertical- and horizontal-edge details and metal thicknesses.

3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.

4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.

5. Details of each different wall opening condition.

6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1305
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-2

7. Details of accessories.

8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.

9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

D. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow-metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.

Coordinate with final Door Hardware Schedule.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Test Reports: For each type of hollow-metal door and frame assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or equal:

1. DKS Steel Door & Frame Systems, Inc.

2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.

3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company.

4. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

5. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.

6. Industrial Louvers Inc.

7. Activar CPG Air Louvers.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1306
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-3
A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.3 INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct interior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic-coated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch.
d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Core: Steel stiffened.

3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch. b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime. Finish paint in accordance with Section 09 91 00 “Painting”.

2.4 EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A. Construct exterior doors and frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Commercial Doors and Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861. At locations indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. Exterior doors shall meet STC ratings shown in the Drawings.

1. Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.

2. Doors:
a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches
c. Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch, with minimum G60 A60 coating.
d. Edge Construction: Continuously welded with no visible seam. e. Core: Steel stiffened.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1307
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-4
1) Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermalresistance value (R-value) of not less than 2.1 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.

3. Frames:
a. Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.067 inch, with minimum Gavannealed A90 coating.
b. Construction: Full profile welded.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime. Finish paint in accordance with Section 09 91 00 “Painting” Section 3.07 SCHEDULE – EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS. Color: to match adjacent tile as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer’s complete range. Provide samples in accordance with Section 09 91 00 “Painting” 1.3 Submittals. a. Shop-Primed Ferrous Metal
b. Galvannealed Metal

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS
A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than

0.042 inch thick.

2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inchdiameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.6 MATERIALS
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

E. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

F. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1308
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-5
G. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated.

H. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

I. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

J. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing." K. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.7 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Doors:

1. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Bevel edges 1/8 inch in 2 inches.

2. Top Edge Closures: Close top edges of doors with flush closures of same material as face sheets.

3. Bottom Edge Closures: Close bottom edges of doors where required for attachment of weather stripping with end closures or channels of same material as face sheets.

4. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

5. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated. Extend minimum 3/4 inch beyond edge of door on which astragal is mounted or as required to comply with published listing of qualified testing agency.

C. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1309
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-6
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.
3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high.
4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

b. Post installed Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

4. Head Anchors: Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and edge channels from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation of hollow-metal work for hardware.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with mitered hairline joints.

1. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

2. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.

3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated.

2.8 STEEL FINISHES
A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

2.9 LOUVERS
A. Product: Activa Air Louvers “700TL”, or equal. Flush mounted louver for transoms. Product includes two rows of inverted split “Y” blades in a 1-13/16 in. frame for flush mounting in hollow metal frames. Material is 18 gauge #304 stainless steel with #4 finish with stainless steel insect screen. Prime louvers in shop: Gray prime coat only. Finish color to match door color as approved by Architect and Owner. Refer to Section 09 91 00 “Paint” for additional finish paint requirements.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1310
San Carlos Downtown Implementation Plan Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-7
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a. At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

C. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured.
d. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
e. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that will be filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with post-installed expansion anchors.
a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames.

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1311
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATE 100% Submittal / Bid Set HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 11 13-8

4. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with mineral-fiber insulation.

5. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a. Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. c. At Bottom of Door: 3/4 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch. d. Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors and gaskets according to NFPA 105.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 4 – MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.1 All work under this section shall be included in the lump sum price bid for restroom and shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals.

END OF SECTION 08 11 13

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1312
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-1
SECTION 08 31 00 - ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Fire-resistive rated and non-rated access doors, panels, and frames, complete.

1. Not all access doors are explicitly indicated on Drawings. Provide all access doors required by the various trades and coordinated as to location and size, whether specifically indicated or not.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Masonry Unit: CMU walls

2. Section 06 10 00 – Rough Carpentry: Wall and ceiling framing.

3. Section 09 30 00 – Tiling

4. Section 09 34 13 – Adhered Porcelain Tile Cladding

3. Section 09 91 00 – Painting.

4. Division 22 - Plumbing.

1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. See Division 1 General Provisions Section 4.19 Submittals and Special Provisions Section 27 Submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog cuts and product data on each type of access door. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. Submit manufacturer's recommended installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS
A. Recessed Access Doors in Drywall Substrates

1. Manufacturer: J. L. Industries "Style WB"; Karp Associates "Type KDW"; Milcor "Style DW"; or equal.

2. Features
a. Frame: 16-gage steel with an integral galvanized steel drywall bead. b. Door: 14-gage steel, fitted flush with integral bead. c. Hinges: Concealed spring hinges permitting 175 degree opening. d. Lock: Flush screwdriver operated cam locks for all access doors except provide flush key operated cylinder locks for access doors in all public areas.

B. Stainless Steel Access Doors in Ceramic Tile Substrates:

1. Manufacturer: J. L. Industries "Style TMS"; Karp Associates "Type DSC-214M Stainless Steel"; Milcor "Style MS"; or equal.

2. Features

8.e
November 10, 2025 Packet Pg. 1313
San Carlos Downtown Plan Implementation Phase 1A
WARE ASSOCIATES 100% Submittal / Bid Set ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 31 00-2
a. Frame: 16-gage stainless steel with a nominal 1-inch exposed frame flange. Provide galvanized steel anchors appropriate for substrate.
b. Door: 14-gage stainless steel, fitted flush with frame flange. Reinforce access doors over 24 inches wide to prevent sagging.
c. Hinges: Concealed spring hinges permitting 175 degree opening. d. Lock: Flush key operated stainless steel cylinder locks.

San Carlos City CouncilNovember 10, 2025

San Carlos City Council
November 10, 2025